Проблема
Причина
Решение
Возможно, телефонное соединение
некачественное.
Попробуйте повторить попытку
позже.
Устройство, получающее факс,
может быть неисправно.
Попробуйте отправить факс на
другие устройства.
Телефонная линия не
функционирует.
Отключите факсимильный аппарат
от розетки и подключите телефон.
Попробуйте позвонить с телефона,
чтобы убедиться, что телефонная
линия работает.
Дозвон при отправке факса.
Факс-плата автоматически повторяет
набор, если функция
Повтор при
занятости
включена или функция
Повтор набора при отсутствии ответа
включена.
Это нормальное состояние. Если вы
не хотите повторения набора,
установите функцию
Повтор при
занятости
на 0,
Повтор набора при
отсутствии ответа
на 0 и
Повтор при
ошибке связи
на 0.
Отправляемые факсы не приходят на
получающее устройство.
Возможно, получающее устройство
выключено или возникли ошибки,
например, нет бумаги.
Попросите получателя, чтобы он
убедился, что устройство включено и
готово к приему факсов.
Возможно, факс находится в памяти
и ожидает повторного набора
занятого номера, или существуют
другие задания, которые ожидают
отправки.
Если факс сохранен в памяти по
одной из указанных причин, в
рабочем журнале факса появляется
соответствующая запись.
Распечатайте журнал активности
факса и проверьте, нет ли в столбце
Результат заданий с состоянием
Отложено.
Коды ошибок факса
В случае возникновения проблем с факсом, которые мешают или прерывают получение факса,
формируется код ошибки, с помощью которого можно определить причину, вызвавшую
проблему. Коды ошибок можно посмотреть в журнале активности факса, в отчете по вызовам
факса, а также в трассировке протокола T.30. Распечатайте один из этих трех журналов для
получения кода ошибки. Подробные описания кодов ошибок и способов их устранения
находятся на веб-сервере
www.hp.com
. Поиск: аналоговой факс-платы Analog Fax Accessory
500 для принтеров HP LaserJet.
Сообщения об ошибках факса на панели управления
Если процесс передачи факса прерван или произошла ошибка, подсистема факса создает
отчет состояния/ошибки в устройстве из двух частей. После нормальной или успешной
отправки факса создаются сообщения об успешной отправке. Сообщение состоит из текста
описания и числового кода (лишь некоторые сообщения не содержат код). На панели
управления устройства отображается только тестовая часть сообщения, однако в Отчете об
активности факса, Отчете по вызовам факса и Трассировке T.30 факса отображается как
текстовая, так и числовая часть. Числовой код отображается в скобках после текстовой части
сообщения отчета.
RUWW
Устранение неполадок факса
293
-
Contents
-
Table of Contents
-
Troubleshooting
-
Bookmarks
Related Manuals for HP LASERJET ENTERPRISE M725dn
Summary of Contents for HP LASERJET ENTERPRISE M725dn
-
Page 1
LASERJET ENTERPRISE MFP M725 Troubleshooting Manual M725dn M725f M725z M725z+… -
Page 3
HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M725 Troubleshooting Manual… -
Page 4
Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Part number: CF066-91023… -
Page 5
Conventions used in this guide TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts. NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task. CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product. -
Page 6
Conventions used in this guide ENWW… -
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Table of contents 1 Theory of operation ………………….1 Basic operation ……………………2 Function structure …………………. 2 Operation sequence ………………..2 Engine control system ………………….. 4 DC controller PCA ………………… 5 Motor control ………………… 7 Motor locations …………….7 Failure detection …………….. 8 Fan control ………………..
-
Page 8
Development block ………………. 26 Step 3: Developing …………..26 Transfer block ………………27 Step 4: Image transfer …………… 27 Step 5: Separation from the drum ……….27 Fuser block ………………..29 Step 6: Fusing …………….29 Drum-cleaning block …………….. 29 Step 7: Drum cleaning …………… -
Page 9
Fuser wrap jam 1 ………………53 Door open jam 1 ………………53 Multiple-feed jam 1 ……………… 53 Automatic delivery ………………..53 Scanning/image capture system ………………..54 Scanner ……………………. 54 Automatic document feed system …………….54 Sensors in the document feeder …………..54 Document feeder paper path ………….. -
Page 10
HCI cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection ….79 HCI lift-up operation …………….. 80 HCI cassette media-presence detection …………81 HCI jam detection ………………..82 No pick jam 2 ………………82 No pick jam 3 ………………82 Residual paper jam 1 …………….83 Door open jam 1 ……………… -
Page 11
2 Solve problems ………………….111 Solve problems checklist ………………….. 112 Helpful printed pages ………………….114 Menu map ………………….114 Current settings pages ………………. 114 Preboot menu options ………………….115 Troubleshooting process ………………….122 Determine the problem source …………….. 122 Troubleshooting flowchart …………… 122 Power subsystem ……………….. -
Page 12
Set up an auto cleaning page ……….. 217 Print a configuration page …………… 218 Configuration page …………..218 HP embedded Jetdirect page ………… 219 Finding important information on the configuration pages …. 220 Control panel menus ………………..221 Administration menu …………….221 Reports menu ……………. -
Page 13
Network Settings menu …………275 Troubleshooting menu ………….. 289 Device Maintenance menu …………..293 Backup/Restore menu ………….. 293 Calibration/Cleaning menu …………294 USB Firmware Upgrade menu ……….. 295 Service menu …………….295 Interpret control-panel messages …………….296 Control-panel message types …………..296 Control-panel messages ……………. -
Page 14
13.B2.AX Jam in top cover area ……….309 13.B2.D1 Jam in tray 1 …………310 13.B2.D2 Jam in top cover area (tray 2) ……..310 13.B2.D3 Jam in top cover area (tray 3) (no optional input devices installed) …………..311 13.B2.D3 Jam in top cover area (tray 3) (optional input devices installed) ……………. -
Page 15
30.01.46 …………….327 30.03.14 …………….327 30.03.20 …………….328 30.03.22 …………….328 30.03.23 …………….328 30.03.30 …………….329 30.03.45 …………….329 31.01.47 …………….329 31.03.30 …………….329 31.03.31 …………….330 31.03.32 …………….330 31.08.A1 …………….331 31.08.A2 …………….331 31.08.A3 …………….331 31.13.01 ……………. -
Page 16
41.03.YZ Unexpected size in Tray <X> ……..343 41.03.YZ Unexpected size in Tray <X> To use another tray, touch «Options» …………….343 41.05.YZ Unexpected type in Tray <X> ……..344 41.05.YZ Unexpected type in Tray <X> To use another tray, touch «Options»… -
Page 17
69.11.YY Error To continue, touch “OK” ……..362 70.00.00 Error To continue turn off then on ……. 362 80.0X.YY Embedded Jetdirect Error ……….. 363 81.WX.00 Wireless Network Error To continue turn off then on ..364 81.WX.YZ Embedded JetDirect Error To continue turn off then on .. 365 81.YY.YY EIO Error To continue turn off then on …… -
Page 18
Card slot file operation failed To clear touch “Clear” ….375 Card slot file system is full To clear touch “Clear” ……375 Card slot is write protected To clear touch “Clear” …… 375 Card slot not initialized To clear touch “Clear” ……375 Cartridge ship mode ………….. -
Page 19
Load Tray <X>: [Size] To continue, touch “OK” ……384 Load Tray <X>: [Size] To use another tray, touch «Options» ..384 Load Tray <X>: [Type], [Size] ……….. 384 Load Tray <X>: [Type], [Size] To use another tray, touch «Options» …………….385 Manually feed output stack Then touch «OK»… -
Page 20
Tray <X> empty: [Type], [Size] ……….394 Tray <X> open ……………. 394 Tray <X> overfilled Remove excess paper ……..394 Tray <X> overfilled To use another tray, touch «Options» ….. 394 Type mismatch Tray <X> …………395 Unable to cancel firmware update job ……..395 Unable to install the firmware ……….. -
Page 21
Clear jams in the 3,500-sheet high-capacity tray …………418 Clear jams from the toner-cartridge area …………..421 Clear jams in the fuser ………………. 424 Clear jams from the duplexer ……………… 426 Solve paper-handling problems ………………..427 The product picks up multiple sheets of paper …………427 The product does not pick up paper ……………. -
Page 22
USB storage device (control-panel menu) ……….. 470 Appendix A Service and support ………………471 Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement …………….472 HP’s Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement ….474 HP policy on non-HP supplies ………………..475 HP anticounterfeit Web site ………………..476 Data stored on the toner cartridge ……………… -
Page 23
Power consumption ………………..489 Toner consumption ………………..489 Paper use ………………….489 Plastics ……………………. 489 HP LaserJet print supplies ………………490 Return and recycling instructions …………….490 United States and Puerto Rico …………..490 Multiple returns (more than one cartridge) ……..490 Single returns ……………. -
Page 24
EU Statement for Telecom Operation …………… 504 New Zealand Telecom Statements …………….504 Additional FCC statement for telecom products (US) ……….504 Telephone Consumer Protection Act (US) …………..505 Industry Canada CS-03 requirements …………..505 Vietnam Telecom wired/wireless marking for ICTQC Type approved products ….. 506 Japan Telecom Mark ………………… -
Page 25
List of tables Table 1-1 Operation sequence ………………….. 3 Table 1-2 Motor locations ……………………7 Table 1-3 Fan locations ……………………. 9 Table 1-4 Low voltage power supply DC power specifications …………..12 Table 1-5 Pickup, feed, and delivery system sensors and switches …………. 34 Table 1-6 Pickup, feed, and delivery system solenoid and motors …………. 36 Table 1-7 Media switch combinations ……………….. -
Page 26
Table 2-11 Tray/bin manual sensor test ………………..153 Table 2-12 Component tests ………………….. 185 Table 2-13 1×500-sheet paper deck cross section …………….. 189 Table 2-14 3×500-sheet paper deck cross section …………….. 190 Table 2-15 3,500-sheet HCI cross section ……………….. 191 Table 2-16 Important information on the configuration pages …………..220 Table 2-17 Reports menu …………………… -
Page 27
List of figures Figure 1-1 Function structure ……………………2 Figure 1-2 Engine control system ………………….4 Figure 1-3 DC controller PCA ……………………. 5 Figure 1-4 Motor locations ……………………7 Figure 1-5 Fan locations ……………………9 Figure 1-6 Low-voltage power-supply PCA ………………… 11 Figure 1-7 High-voltage power-supply PCA ……………….. 14 Figure 1-8 Fuser components …………………… -
Page 28
Figure 1-33 Skew-feed prevention ………………….45 Figure 1-34 Fuse and delivery block …………………. 47 Figure 1-35 Loop control ……………………48 Figure 1-36 Output bin media-full detection ……………….. 49 Figure 1-37 Product engine jam detection sensors and switches …………..51 Figure 1-38 Document feeder path for single-sided documents …………..55 Figure 1-39 Document feeder path for two-sided documents ………….. -
Page 29
Figure 1-74 Jogger guide in the alignment position …………….103 Figure 1-75 Leading end alienation roller activates …………….103 Figure 1-76 Alignment complete ………………….104 Figure 1-77 Jogger guide in the turnout position ………………. 105 Figure 1-78 Paper stack goes to the output bin ………………105 Figure 1-79 Paper stack goes to the output bin in stacker mode ………….. -
Page 30
Figure 2-34 Tray 4 paper feed sensor ………………..175 Figure 2-35 Tray 4 door open sensor ………………..176 Figure 2-36 Tray 5 paper sensor ………………….177 Figure 2-37 Tray paper surface sensor ………………..178 Figure 2-38 Tray 5 paper size sensor ………………..179 Figure 2-39 Tray 5 feed sensor ………………….180 Figure 2-40 HCI exit sensor …………………… -
Page 31
Figure 2-75 HP embedded Jetdirect page ……………….. 219 Figure 2-76 Sample event log ………………….400 Figure 2-77 Product base paper path and sensor locations (1 of 2) …………405 Figure 2-78 Product base paper path and sensor locations (2 of 2) …………405 Figure 2-79 1×500 paper feeder paper path and sensor locations …………405 Figure 2-80 1×500 and 3×500 paper deck paper path and sensor locations ……….. -
Page 32
ENWW… -
Page 33: Theory Of Operation
Theory of operation Basic operation ● Engine control system ● Laser scanner system ● Image-formation system ● Pickup, feed, and delivery system ● Scanning/image capture system ● 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 4) ● 1×500 and 3×500 paper feeder and stand ●…
-
Page 34: Basic Operation
Basic operation Function structure The product contains the following systems: Engine control system ● Laser scanner system ● Image-formation system ● Pickup, feed, and delivery system ● Accessory ● Figure 1-1 Function structure Laser scanner system Image-formation system Engine control system Pickup, feed, and delivery system Accessory Operation sequence…
-
Page 35: Table 1-1 Operation Sequence
Table 1-1 Operation sequence Period Duration Purpose WAIT period From the time the power switch Brings the product to the Ready state. is turned on, the door is closed Detects the failure of the low-voltage power supply ● or, product exits Sleep mode until the product is ready for a Detects the connection with the accessories ●…
-
Page 36: Engine Control System
Engine control system The engine-control system coordinates all the other systems, according to commands from the formatter. The engine-control system contains the following components: DC controller PCA ● Low-voltage power supply unit ● High-voltage power supply PCA ● Fuser control ●…
-
Page 37: Dc Controller Pca
DC controller PCA The DC controller PCA controls the product operation sequence. Figure 1-3 DC controller PCA AC input Low-voltage power supply Motor Fuser Solenoid Clutch High-voltage Transfer roller power supply Photointerrupter Cartridge DC controller Sensor Switch Control panel Duplex unit (Accessory) USB PCA Input source accessory…
-
Page 38
Component type Component Component name abbreviation Solenoid Tray 1 (MP tray) pickup solenoid Clutch Upper cassette pickup clutch Lower cassette pickup clutch Rear fan Front fan Fuser fan Photointerrupter Cartridge presence sensor MP tray media out sensor Output sensor Output bin media full sensor Lower cassette media out sensor Loop sensor Upper cassette media out sensor… -
Page 39: Motor Control
Motor control The product uses five motors for the paper-feed and image-formation process. Motor locations The following figure shows the product motor locations. Figure 1-4 Motor locations Table 1-2 Motor locations Motor Components driven by motor Drum motor Photosensitive drum, transfer roller, registration roller, MP tray pickup roller, cassette pickup roller, and feed roller Scanner motor Laser scanner mirror…
-
Page 40: Failure Detection
Failure detection The DC controller monitors the following motors to determine a motor failure: Drum motor ● Scanner motor ● Fuser motor ● The DC controller determines if the motor has failed and notifies the formatter when the motor encounters the following conditions: Startup failure—The motor does not reach a specified rotational count within a specified time from ●…
-
Page 41: Fan Control
Fan control The product has three fans to prevent the temperature from rising in the product and to cool down the delivered paper. Fan locations The following figure shows the product fan locations. Figure 1-5 Fan locations Table 1-3 Fan locations Cooling area Type Speed…
-
Page 42: Failure Detection
Failure detection The DC controller determines if the fan has failed and notifies the formatter when the fan stops rotating for a specified time during start-up. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW…
-
Page 43: Low-Voltage Power-Supply Pca
Low-voltage power-supply PCA The low-voltage power supply converts AC power into the DC voltage that product components use. Figure 1-6 Low-voltage power-supply PCA AC input Low-voltage power supply High-voltage power supply DC controller Interlock High-voltage switch Power fuse circuit +24VD Fuser circuit Power fuse Zerocross…
-
Page 44: Over-Current/Over-Voltage/Overload Protection
Table 1-4 Low voltage power supply DC power specifications DC voltage Behavior +24V +24VB Off during Sleep mode (sleep level1, active off and inactive off) +24VC Off during Sleep mode (sleep level1, active off and inactive off), interrupted when the left door opens +24VD Off during Sleep mode (sleep level1, active off and inactive off), interrupted when the left door or…
-
Page 45: Power Supply Voltage Detection
Power supply voltage detection The power supply voltage detection controls the fuser properly according to the voltage. The DC controller detects whether the low-voltage power supply voltage is 100V or 220V, according to the POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE signal (/PSTYP100). Sleep mode The Sleep mode reduces the power consumption of the product.
-
Page 46: High-Voltage Power-Supply Pca
High-voltage power-supply PCA The high-voltage power supply applies positive or negative voltage biases to the following components: Primary charging roller ● Developing roller ● Transfer roller ● Static charge eliminator ● Fuser film ● Figure 1-7 High-voltage power-supply PCA Fuser Fuser film Pressure roller DC controller…
-
Page 47
Static charge eliminator bias ● The static charge eliminator bias is used to improve the paper-feed performance and image- quality. The static charge eliminator bias circuit generates the bias. Fusing bias ● The fusing bias is used to improve the image-quality. The primary charging bias circuit generates the bias. -
Page 48: Fuser Control
Fuser control The fuser heater control circuit and the fuser heater safety circuit control the fuser temperature according to commands from the DC controller. The product uses an on-demand fusing method. Figure 1-8 Fuser components H1/H2 Fuser film Pressure roller FUSER TEMPERATURE signal FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal Fuser heater…
-
Page 49: Figure 1-9 Fuser Control System
Component Function Sub thermistor 1 Detects the temperature at ends of the fuser heater (contact type) Sub thermistor 2 Sub thermistor 3 Figure 1-9 Fuser control system AC input DC controller Low-voltage power supply Zerocross detection /ZEROX circuit High-voltage power supply RL1001 Relay drive circuit RL1002…
-
Page 50: Fuser Temperature Control
Fuser temperature control The fuser temperature control maintains the temperature of the fuser heater at its targeted temperature. The DC controller monitors the FUSER TEMPERATURE signals (MFSRTH, S1FSRTH, S2FSRTH and S3FSRTH), and sends the FUSER HEATER CONTROL signals (FSRD1 and FSRD2). The fuser heater control circuit controls the fuser heater depending on the signals, so that the fuser heater remains at the targeted temperature.
-
Page 51: Fuser Failure Detection
Fuser failure detection The DC controller determines if the fuser functions properly. The DC controller determines a fuser failure, interrupts the power supply to the fuser heater, and notifies the formatter of a failure state when it encounters the following conditions: Abnormally high temperature 1 ●…
-
Page 52: Pressure Roller Cleaning
Drive circuit failure ● The frequency of the ZEROCROSS signal is not detected in a specified value range within a specified period after power-on. The frequency of the ZEROCROSS signal is not detected in a specified value range for a specified period after power-on and once the signal is detected.
-
Page 53: Laser Scanner System
Laser scanner system The DC controller controls the laser scanner system according to commands from the formatter. The DC controller controls the internal components in the laser scanner system to form the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum according to the VIDEO signals. The following are the main components of the laser scanner system: Laser assembly ●…
-
Page 54: Laser Scanner Failure Detection
Laser scanner failure detection The DC controller determines a laser scanner failure and notifies the formatter of the error state when any of the following conditions occurs: Beam detect (BD) failure ● A specified BD interval is not detected within a specified period during the scanner motor drive. Scanner motor start-up failure ●…
-
Page 55: Image-Formation System
Image-formation system The DC controller controls the image-formation system according to commands from the formatter. The DC controller controls the internal components of the image-formation system to form the toner image on the photosensitive drum surface. The toner image is transferred to the paper and fused. The following are the main components of the image-formation system: Cartridge ●…
-
Page 56: Figure 1-12 Image-Formation Components
The DC controller rotates the drum motor to drive the following components: Photosensitive drum ● Developing roller (follows the photosensitive drum) ● Primary charging roller (follows the photosensitive drum) ● Transfer roller ● The DC controller rotates the fuser motor to drive the following components: Pressure roller ●…
-
Page 57: Image-Formation Process
Image-formation process The image-formation process consists of seven steps divided into five functional blocks: Latent-image-formation system ● Step 1: Primary charging ◦ Step 2: Laser-beam exposure ◦ Developing system ● Step 3: Developing ◦ Transfer system ● Step 4: Transfer ◦…
-
Page 58: Step 2: Laser-Beam Exposure
charging bias is applied to the primary charging roller to keep a negative potential on the drum surface. Figure 1-14 Primary charging Primary charging roller Primary charging bias Photosensitive drum Step 2: Laser-beam exposure The laser-beam strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum to neutralize the negative charge. An electrostatic latent image forms where the negative charge was neutralized.
-
Page 59: Transfer Block
image on the photosensitive drum because the drum surface has a higher potential. The latent image becomes visible on the drum. Figure 1-16 Developing Developing roller Developer blade Developing bias Photosensitive drum Transfer block During the two steps that comprise this block, a toner image on the photosensitive drum transfers to the paper.
-
Page 60: Figure 1-18 Separation From The Drum
eliminator. The static charge eliminator reduces backside static discharge of the paper after the transfer process for stable paper-feed and print-quality. Figure 1-18 Separation from the drum Photosensitive drum Paper Static charge eliminator Transfer roller Static charge eliminator bias Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW…
-
Page 61: Fuser Block
Fuser block Until the fusing stage is complete, the image is not permanently affixed to the paper. The toner can be easily smudged until the heat and pressure of the fusing process fix the image to the sheet. Step 6: Fusing Heat and pressure melt the toner as the paper passes through the rollers.
-
Page 62: Figure 1-21 Toner Cartridge Components
Primary charging roller ● Memory tag ● Figure 1-21 Toner cartridge components DC controller High-voltage power supply Drum motor Cartridge Memory Tag Developing roller Primary charging roller Photosensitive drum The cartridge serves a role in the following functions: Memory tag ●…
-
Page 63: Other Image-Formation Functions
The DC controller detects the remaining toner level in a cartridge according to the TONER LEVEL signal. The DC controller determines a cartridge low warning or cartridge end-of-life when the toner level drops below a specified level and notifies the formatter. Cartridge-life detection ●…
-
Page 64: Environment Change Control
The transfer roller cleaning is performed during the WAIT period, INTR period, LSTR period, and after forming the image for the front side of the page when duplex printing. Figure 1-23 Transfer roller cleaning Cleaning blade Photosensitive drum Toner collection box Transfer roller Reverse transfer bias Environment change control…
-
Page 65: Pickup, Feed, And Delivery System
Pickup, feed, and delivery system The DC controller controls the pickup, feed, and delivery system according to commands from the formatter. The DC controller controls each block to pickup, feed, and deliver the paper. The pickup, feed, and delivery system consists of following three functional blocks: Pickup-and-feed block ●…
-
Page 66: Table 1-5 Pickup, Feed, And Delivery System Sensors And Switches
Figure 1-25 Pickup, feed, and delivery system sensors and switches SR12 SR10 SR11 Table 1-5 Pickup, feed, and delivery system sensors and switches Component Signal Left door interlock switch LEFT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal Cartridge door interlock switch CARTRIDGE DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal Cartridge door open detection switch CARTRIDGE DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal Upper cassette media width switch…
-
Page 67
Table 1-5 Pickup, feed, and delivery system sensors and switches (continued) Component Signal Lower cassette media out sensor LOWER CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal Loop sensor LOOP LEVEL signal Upper cassette media out sensor UPPER CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal Right door sensor RIGHT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal TOP sensor TOP signal… -
Page 68: Table 1-6 Pickup, Feed, And Delivery System Solenoid And Motors
Figure 1-26 Pickup, feed, and delivery-system solenoid and motors Table 1-6 Pickup, feed, and delivery system solenoid and motors Component Signal MP tray pickup solenoid MP TRAY PICKUP SOLENOID signal Upper cassette pickup clutch UPPER CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH signal Lower cassette pickup clutch LOWER CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH signal Drum motor DRUM MOTOR CONTROL signal…
-
Page 69: Pickup-And-Feed Block
Pickup-and-feed block The pickup-and-feed block picks one sheet of paper from the cassette or the MP tray and feeds it into the fuser. Figure 1-27 Pickup-and-feed block Pickup, feed, and delivery system ENWW…
-
Page 70: Cassette Pickup
Cassette pickup The product picks up one sheet of paper from the cassette. The following figure shows the cassette pickup mechanism. Both trays have the same mechanism. Figure 1-28 Cassette pickup mechanism DC controller Drum motor Cassette pickup clutch Cassette pickup roller Feed roller Cassette separation roller The operational sequence of the cassette pickup is as follows:…
-
Page 71: Cassette Lift Operation
The cassette media-size detection and the cassette-presence detection are not performed during Sleep mode. The following table lists the combination of the switches. Table 1-7 Media switch combinations Paper size Cassette media width switch Cassette media end switch Center Bottom Center Bottom Cassette…
-
Page 72: Cassette Media-Presence Detection
When a print job is not sent for a specified period, the DC controller reverses the cassette lifter motor until the cassette lift-up sensor stops sensing the lifter rack. When the casette lift-up sensor keeps sensing the lifter rack for a specified period from when the lift- down operation starts, the DC controller determines a cassette lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter.
-
Page 73: Figure 1-30 Cassette Multiple-Feed Prevention
When multiple sheets are picked up, the cassette separation roller does not rotate and only one sheet is fed into the product. Figure 1-30 Cassette multiple-feed prevention Cassette pickup roller Cassette separation roller Paper The cassette separation roller does not rotate. <Normal-feed>…
-
Page 74: Mp Tray Pickup
MP tray pickup The product picks up one sheet of paper from the MP tray. Figure 1-31 MP tray pickup DC controller Drum motor MP tray pickup solenoid MP tray Paper media out sensor MP tray pickup roller MP tray separation pad Lifting plate The operational sequence of the MP tray pickup is as follows: The DC controller rotates the drum motor when it receives a print command from the formatter.
-
Page 75: Mp Tray Multiple-Feed Prevention
MP tray multiple-feed prevention The product uses a MP tray separation pad to prevent multiple sheets of paper from entering into the product at one time. When multiple sheets are picked up, multiple sheets stop due to the friction against the MP tray separation pad, and only one page is fed into the product.
-
Page 76
Print mode Feed-speed Glossy media 3 — Glossy film — Photo media 1 — Photo media 2 — Photo media 3 — Envelope 1 Envelope 2 Envelope 3 — Label — Designated media 1 — Designated media 2 — Designated media 3 —… -
Page 77: Skew-Feed Prevention
Skew-feed prevention The product uses a registration shutter to correct the skew feed without decreasing the feeding speed. Figure 1-33 Skew-feed prevention Feed roller Registration shutter Paper Registration shutter Paper Feed roller The operational sequence of the skew-feed prevention is as follows: The leading edge of paper strikes the registration shutter as the paper is fed.
-
Page 78: Media-Length Detection
Media-length detection The DC controller detects the length of paper to prevent toner stain on the transfer roller and also to minimize jam occurrences in the duplexer. The DC controller measures the length of paper by monitoring the time from when the leading edge of paper reaches the TOP sensor until the trailing edge passes through, and then determines the paper size.
-
Page 79: Fuse And Delivery Block
Fuse and delivery block The fuse and delivery block fuses the toner image onto the paper and delivers the printed page to the face-down output bin. Figure 1-34 Fuse and delivery block Output bin Pickup, feed, and delivery system ENWW…
-
Page 80: Loop Control
Loop control The product controls the loop of paper to prevent print-quality and paper-feed defects. If the fuser film/pressure roller rotates slower than the photosensitive drum/transfer roller, the ● paper loop increases. If the fuser film/pressure roller rotates faster than the photosensitive drum/transfer roller, the paper ●…
-
Page 81: Output Bin Media-Full Detection
Output bin media-full detection The DC controller detects whether the output bin is full by monitoring the output bin media full sensor. Figure 1-36 Output bin media-full detection DC controller Output bin media full sensor Paper Output bin media full sensor lever Output bin When the output-bin media-full sensor detects paper for a specified period during a print operation, the…
-
Page 82: Jam Detection
Jam detection The product uses the following sensors and switches to detect the presence of paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed: Left door interlock switch (SW1) ● Cartridge door interlock switch (SW2) ●…
-
Page 83: No Pick Jam 1
Output bin media full sensor (SR4) ● Right door sensor (SR8) ● Figure 1-37 Product engine jam detection sensors and switches SR12 No pick jam 1 MP tray ● The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period (including two retries) from when the MP tray pickup solenoid is turned on.
-
Page 84: Feed Stay Jam 1
The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the paper passes through the duplex waiting position. Input accessory ● The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the following sensors detect the leading edge, depending on the input accessory that is installed.
-
Page 85: Residual Paper Jam 1
Residual paper jam 1 Either one of the following sensors detects a paper-presence when the product is turned on or when the door is closed: TOP sensor ● Loop sensor ● Fuser output sensor ● Either one of the following sensors detects a paper-presence when the automatic delivery is complete: TOP sensor ●…
-
Page 86: Scanning/Image Capture System
Scanning/image capture system Scanner The scanner is a carriage-type platen scanner which includes the frame, glass, LED optics, and a scanner controller board (SCB) attached to the back of the assembly. The scanner has two sensors to detect legal and ledger/A3 sized media and a switch to indicate when the document feeder is open. The document feeder and control-panel assembly are attached to the scanner assembly.
-
Page 87: Document Feeder Paper Path
Document feeder paper path The document feeder feeds documents past the document feeder glass for scanning. Figure 1-38 Document feeder path for single-sided documents Separation pad Document feeder input tray Pickup roller Delivery/duplex-feed rollers Stack stop Document feeder glass Pre-pick roller Document feeder feed rollers For two-sided documents, the delivery rollers reverse the direction of each page to feed the second side of the document past the document feeder glass.
-
Page 88: Figure 1-39 Document Feeder Path For Two-Sided Documents
Figure 1-39 Document feeder path for two-sided documents NOTE: Callouts in Figure 1-39 Document feeder path for two-sided documents on page 56 identical to callouts in Figure 1-38 Document feeder path for single-sided documents on page 55 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW…
-
Page 89: 500-Sheet Paper Feeder (Tray 4)
500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 4) The paper feeder is optionally installed at bottom of the product. It picks up the paper and feeds it to the product. The paper feeder controller controls the operational sequence of the paper feeder. Figure 1-40 500-sheet paper feeder paper path PF cassette pickup roller 500-sheet paper feeder…
-
Page 90: 500-Sheet Paper Feeder Motor Control
Figure 1-41 500-sheet paper feeder signal flow 500-sheet paper feeder Motor +24V Solenoid PF controller DC controller Photointerrupter Switch Table 1-8 500-sheet paper feeder electrical components Component Abbreviation Component name Motor PF cassette pickup motor PF cassette lifter motor Solenoid PF cassette pickup solenoid Photointerrupter PF cassette media feed sensor…
-
Page 91: 500-Sheet Paper Feeder Failure Detection
Table 1-9 500-sheet paper feeder motors Motor Components driven PF cassette pickup motor Pickup roller, separation roller, and feed roller for the PF cassette PF cassette lifter motor Lifter for the PF cassette 500-sheet paper feeder failure detection The paper feeder controller determines a cassette lifter motor failure according to the condition of the related part.
-
Page 92: 500-Sheet Paper Feeder Cassette Pickup
500-sheet paper feeder cassette pickup The paper feeder picks up one sheet of paper from the cassette. Figure 1-44 500-sheet paper feeder pickup and feed cassette pickup PF controller PF cassette pickup motor 1. Cassette pickup cam rotates PF cassette feed roller 2.
-
Page 93: 500-Sheet Paper Feeder Lift-Up Operation
The cassette media-size detection and the cassette-presence detection are not performed during Sleep mode. Table 1-11 500-sheet paper feeder media switch combinations Paper size Cassette media width switch Cassette media end switch Center Bottom Center Bottom Cassette absence A5-R B5-R Executive-R Letter-R A4-R…
-
Page 94: 500-Sheet Paper Feeder Cassette Media-Presence Detection
The operational sequence of the lift-up is as follows: The lifter motor rotates to raise the lifter. The lifter motor stops when the PF cassette media stack surface sensor detects the paper surface. The lifter motor rotates again when the PF cassette media stack surface sensor detects that the stack surface lowers during a print operation.
-
Page 95: 500-Sheet Paper Feeder Jam Detection
its own driving force and the multiple-fed sheets are pushed back to the cassette. Therefore, a single sheet is fed into the product. Figure 1-46 500-sheet paper feeder multiple-feed prevention PF cassette feed roller PF cassette pickup roller Driving force transmitted from the PF cassette feed roller Paper Driving force transmitted from…
-
Page 96: Door Open Jam 1
Door open jam 1 A PF right door open is detected during a paper feed operation. 500-sheet paper feeder automatic delivery The paper feeder automatically clears the paper if the paper feeder cassette media feed sensor detects the residual paper when the product is turned on or when the door is closed. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW…
-
Page 97: 1X500 And 3X500 Paper Feeder And Stand
1×500 and 3×500 paper feeder and stand The 1×500-sheet paper deck is optionally installed at bottom of the product or the 500-sheet paper feeder. The 3×500-sheet paper deck is optionally installed at bottom of the product only. Each of the paper decks picks up the paper and feeds it to the product.
-
Page 98: Figure 1-48 Paper Deck Paper Path
Figure 1-48 Paper deck paper path Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 PD cassette feed roller PD cassette pickup roller 3×500-sheet paper deck PD cassette separation roller Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW…
-
Page 99: Table 1-12 Paper Deck Electrical Components
Figure 1-49 Paper deck signal flow Paper deck cassette 1 Motor +24V Solenoid DC controller PD controller 1 Sensor Switch (3×500 only) Paper deck cassette 2 Motor (3×500 only) PD controller 2 Solenoid Sensor Paper deck cassette 3 Motor (3×500 only) Solenoid PD controller 3 Sensor…
-
Page 100
Table 1-12 Paper deck electrical components (continued) Component Abbreviation Component name Solenoid PD cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL82 PD cassette 2 pickup solenoid SL92 PD cassette 3 pickup solenoid Photointerrupter PD cassette 1 media feed sensor PD cassette 1 media feed sensor PD cassette 1 media out sensor SR81 PD cassette 2 media feed sensor… -
Page 101: Paper Deck Motor Control
Paper deck motor control The paper deck has two motors in each cassette for the paper-feed and cassette lift-up. Figure 1-50 Paper deck motors PD cassette lifter motor PD cassette pickup motor Table 1-13 Paper deck motors Motor Components driven PD cassette 1 pickup motor Pickup roller, separation roller, and feed roller for the PD cassette 1 PD cassette 1 lifter motor…
-
Page 102: Table 1-14 Paper Deck Pickup-And-Feed Operation Components
NOTE: The following figure illustrates the mechanism for paper deck cassette 3, but each paper deck cassette has the same mechanism. Figure 1-51 Paper deck pickup-and-feed components Cassette 1 Cassette 2 SR91 SR93 SR92 Cassette 3 SW92 SW93 SL91 Table 1-14 Paper deck pickup-and-feed operation components Abbreviation Component…
-
Page 103: Paper Deck Cassette Media-Size Detection And Cassette-Presence Detection
Table 1-14 Paper deck pickup-and-feed operation components (continued) Abbreviation Component Signal SW83 PD cassette 2 media end switch PD CASSETTE 2 MEDIA END signal PD cassette 3 pickup motor PD CASSETTE 3 PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal PD cassette 3 lifter motor PD CASSETTE 3 LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal SL91 PD cassette 3 pickup solenoid…
-
Page 104: Paper Deck Lift-Up Operation
Table 1-15 Paper deck media switch combinations (continued) Paper size Cassette media-width switch Cassette media-end switch Center Bottom Center Bottom Ledger Paper deck lift-up operation The paper deck lifts up the tray to keep the surface of paper at the pickup position whenever the following occurs: The product is turned on ●…
-
Page 105: Paper Deck Cassette Media-Presence Detection
The paper deck controller 3 determines a PD cassette 3 lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter through the DC controller when the PD cassette 3 media stack surface sensor does not detect the paper surface within a specified period from when the PD cassette 3 lifter motor starts rotating. Paper deck cassette media-presence detection The paper deck controller detects whether the paper is loaded in the cassette by monitoring the PD cassette media out sensor.
-
Page 106: No Pick Jam 3 (3X500-Sheet Paper Deck Only)
The PD cassette 1 media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the PD cassette 3 media feed sensor detects the leading edge. (3×500-sheet paper deck only) No pick jam 3 (3×500-sheet paper deck only) The PD cassette 2 media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period (including two retries) from when the PD cassette 2 pickup solenoid is turned on.
-
Page 107: 3,500-Sheet High-Capacity Input (Hci) Feeder
3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder The 3,500-sheet paper deck is optionally installed at bottom of the product or the 500-sheet paper feeder. It picks up the paper and feeds it into the product. The HCI controller controls the operational sequence of the 3,500-sheet paper deck. Figure 1-54 HCI paper path 3,500-sheet paper deck…
-
Page 108: Table 1-16 Hci Electrical Components
Figure 1-55 HCI signal flow 3,500-sheet paper deck Motor +24V Solenoid HCI controller DC controller Photointerrupter Switch Table 1-16 HCI electrical components Component Abbreviation Component name Motor M3301 HCI right cassette pickup motor M3302 HCI right cassette lifter motor M3303 HCI left cassette lifter motor M3304 HCI left cassette pickup motor…
-
Page 109: Hci Motor Control
HCI motor control The HCI uses two motors in each cassette for paper-feed and cassette lift-up. Figure 1-56 HCI motors HCI cassette pickup motor HCI cassette lifter motor Table 1-17 HCI motors Motor Components driven M3301 HCI right cassette pickup motor Pickup roller, separation roller, and feed roller for the HCI right cassette M3302…
-
Page 110: Hci Pickup-And-Feed Operation
HCI pickup-and-feed operation The pickup-and-feed operation picks up one sheet of paper in the 3,500-sheet paper deck cassette and feeds it into the product. Figure 1-57 HCI pickup-and-feed operation M3304 M3301 SL3302 PS3301 PS3203 PS3305 PS3306 PS3302 PS3201 PS3202 PS3103 PS3101 PS3102 SL3301…
-
Page 111: Hci Cassette Media-Size Detection And Cassette-Presence Detection
Table 1-18 HCI pickup-and-feed operation components (continued) Abbreviation Component Signal PS3103 HCI right cassette media out sensor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal PS3201 HCI left cassette media stack surface 2 sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 2 signal PS3202 HCI left cassette media stack surface 1 sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 1…
-
Page 112: Hci Lift-Up Operation
HCI lift-up operation The HCI lifts up the tray to keep the surface of the paper at the pickup position whenever the following occurs: The product is turned on ● The cassette is installed ● The paper stack surface lowers by pickup operation ●…
-
Page 113: Hci Cassette Media-Presence Detection
HCI cassette media-presence detection The HCI controller detects whether paper is loaded in the cassette by monitoring the HCI cassette media out sensor. The cassette media-presence detection is not performed during Sleep mode. When the HCI cassette media out sensor does not detect the paper, the HCI controller determines a media-absence, and it notifies the formatter through the DC controller.
-
Page 114: Hci Jam Detection
HCI jam detection The HCI uses the following sensors to detect the presence of paper and to check whether paper is being fed correctly or has jammed: HCI media feed sensor (PS3301) ● HCI right cassette media feed sensor (PS3302) ●…
-
Page 115: Residual Paper Jam 1
Residual paper jam 1 Either one of the following sensors detects a paper-presence when the automatic delivery is complete: HCI media feed sensor ● HCI right cassette media feed sensor ● HCI left cassette media feed sensor ● Door open jam 1 An HCI right door open or an HCI long edge feed guide open is detected during a paper-feed operation.
-
Page 116: Duplexer
Duplexer The optional duplexer is installed on the left side of the product. The duplexer reverses the output roller and intermediate output roller in the product engine, reverses and feeds the paper passed through the fuser. Then, it detects side misregistration to adjust the starting position of the scanning direction for the second side of paper according to the command from the formatter and feeds it to the product engine.
-
Page 117: Table 1-19 Duplexer Electrical Components
Figure 1-61 Duplexer signal flow Duplex unit Motor Clutch +24V DC controller Duplex controller Photointerrupter Side misregistration sensor Photoreceiver sensor NVRAM Table 1-19 Duplexer electrical components Component Abbreviation Component name Motor Duplex feed motor Duplex fan Clutch Duplex feed clutch Photointerrupter Duplex reverse sensor Duplex re-pickup sensor…
-
Page 118: Duplexer Motor Control
Duplexer motor control The duplexer has one motor. The duplex feed motor reverses the output roller and the intermediate output roller. Also, it drives the duplex reverse roller and the duplex re-pickup roller to feed the paper and to drive the side misregistration sensor and the re-pickup roller. Figure 1-62 Duplexer motor Duplex feed motor…
-
Page 119: Duplexer Fan Control
Duplexer fan control The duplex unit has one fan for preventing the temperature from rising in the duplex unit. The duplex controller determines if the duplex fan has failed and notifies the formatter through the DC controller when the fan fails to operate for a specified time during start-up. Figure 1-63 Duplexer fan Duplex fan…
-
Page 120: Duplexer Reverse-And-Feed Operation
Duplexer reverse-and-feed operation The duplexer reverses the feed and delivery rollers in the product to print on both sides. The paper that passed through the fuser unit reverses its feeding direction and is fed to the duplexer. The duplexer feeds the paper and performs horizontal registration to align the starting position of the main scan for the second-side print.
-
Page 121: Duplexer Reverse-And Feed-Operation Sequence
Duplexer reverse-and feed-operation sequence The operational sequence of the reverse-and-feed operation is as follows: The paper printed on the first side passes through the fuser. The DC controller feeds the paper until the trailing edge of paper reaches the reverse position, after the fuser output sensor detects the trailing edge.
-
Page 122: Figure 1-65 Duplexer Side Misregistration Detection
formatter through the DC controller as a correction value of scanning start position for the second side printing. Figure 1-65 Duplexer side misregistration detection Outline of LED ass ’ y LED for LED for paper right edge detection home-position detection LED for A4-R/A3 size detection LED for Letter-R…
-
Page 123: Side Misregistration Failure Detection
Side misregistration failure detection The duplex controller determines a side misregistration sensor failure and notifies the formatter when it encounters any one of the following condition: The photoreceiver sensor does not output as prescribed when the product is turned on, when the ●…
-
Page 124: Duplexer Jam Detection
Duplexer jam detection The duplexer uses the following sensors to detect the presence of paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed: Duplex reverse sensor (SR1) ● Duplex re-pickup sensor (SR2) ● Figure 1-66 Duplexer jam detection sensors Simplex paper path Duplex paper path…
-
Page 125: Fuser Output Stay Jam 2
Fuser output stay jam 2 The fuser output sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period from when it detects the leading edge. Reverse jam 1 The duplex reverse sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when a reverse operation starts.
-
Page 126: Stapler/Stacker
Stapler/stacker The stapler/stacker is an option installed between the product and the scanner assembly. It delivers the printed page directly to the output bin or delivers the printed page after stapling the page. The stapler/ stacker controller that is connected to the formatter controls the operational sequence of the stapler/ stacker.
-
Page 127: Figure 1-68 Stapler/Stacker Signal Flow
Figure 1-68 Stapler/stacker signal flow Staple stacker Motor Low-voltage power supply Solenoid Staple stacker Sensor controller Formatter +24V Switch +24V Connector PCA Stapler Component Abbreviation Component name Motor M2100 Jogger motor M2101 Feed motor M2102 Alignment-alienation motor — Stapler motor Solenoid SL2100 Flapper solenoid…
-
Page 128: Stapler/Stacker Motor Control
Stapler/stacker motor control The stapler/stacker has four motors for the paper-feed, alignment and stapling. Figure 1-69 Stapler/stacker motor locations Alignment-alienation motor Feed motor Jogger motor Stapler (Stapler motor) Component name Components driven M2100 Jogger motor Jogger guide M2101 Feed motor Feed roller and output lower roller M2102 Alignment-alienation motor…
-
Page 129: Stapler/Stacker Failure Detection
Stapler/stacker failure detection The stapler/stacker controller determines a motor failure according to the condition of the following related part: Jogger motor failure ● The stapler/stacker controller determines a jogger motor failure and notifies the formatter when it encounters the following conditions: The jogger guide in home-position does not move from its home-position within a specified ◦…
-
Page 130: Stapler/Stacker Feed And Delivery Operation
Stapler/stacker feed and delivery operation The stapler/stacker has the following three modes for the feed-and-delivery operation: Staple mode: Staples the paper and piles the stacks on the output bin ● Stack align mode: Does not staple the paper, but aligns the paper stack and delivers to the output ●…
-
Page 131
Abbreviation Component Signal SR2100 Inlet sensor INLET signal SR2101 Left door sensor LEFT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal SR2102 Jogger position sensor JOGGER POSITION signal SR2103 Output sensor OUTPUT signal SR2105 Swing alienation sensor SWING ALIENATION signal SR2106 Output bin media full sensor OUTPUT BIN MEDIA FULL signal —… -
Page 132: Staple Mode/Stack Align Mode
Staple mode/stack align mode Staple mode aligns, staples the paper stack and then delivers it to the output bin. Stack align mode aligns the paper stack and delivers the paper to the output bin without stapling. The operation of the stack align mode is the same as the staple mode except for the stapling operation. The operational sequence of the staple mode is as follows: After receiving the command from the DC controller, the stapler/stacker controller turns on the flapper solenoid to move the output flapper in the product and delivers the paper to the stapler/…
-
Page 133: Figure 1-72 Jogger Guide In The Waiting Position
The stapler/stacker controller prompts the jogger motor to move the jogger guide to the waiting position from the turnout position. Figure 1-72 Jogger guide in the waiting position Jogger guide M2100 Jogger motor Waiting position Turnout position After the jogger guide moves to the waiting position, the stapler/stacker controller drives the alignment-alienation motor to engage the output upper roller and the output lower roller.
-
Page 134: Figure 1-73 Alignment-Alienation Motor Separates Output Rollers
When the paper reaches a specified position in the jogger guide, the stapler/stacker controller drives the alignment-alienation motor to separate the output upper roller from the output lower roller and the paper is released. Figure 1-73 Alignment-alienation motor separates output rollers M2102 Alignment-alienation motor Jogger guide…
-
Page 135: Figure 1-74 Jogger Guide In The Alignment Position
When the paper is released, the stapler/stacker controller drives the jogger motor at the same time to move the jogger guide to the alignment position (width of paper) and aligns both sides of the paper. Figure 1-74 Jogger guide in the alignment position Jogger guide Paper Alignment position…
-
Page 136: Figure 1-76 Alignment Complete
After the alignment operation is complete, the stapler/stacker controller turns on the stamp solenoid and the stamp clamps against the paper, so that the paper on the jogger guide is not pushed out by the following paper. At the same time, the stapler/stacker controller moves the jogger guide and the leading end alignment roller to the waiting position.
-
Page 137: Figure 1-77 Jogger Guide In The Turnout Position
The stapler/stacker controller moves the jogger guide to the turnout position. Figure 1-77 Jogger guide in the turnout position Jogger guide Paper Waiting position Turnout position The paper stack then drops to the output bin. Figure 1-78 Paper stack goes to the output bin M2102 Alignment-alienation motor Output upper roller…
-
Page 138: Stacker Mode
Stacker mode In stacker mode, the product does not staple the printed page and delivers it directly to the output bin. Figure 1-79 Paper stack goes to the output bin in stacker mode Output bin Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW…
-
Page 139: Stapler/Stacker Jam Detection
Stapler/stacker jam detection The stapler/stacker uses the following sensors to detect the presence of paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed: Inlet sensor (SR2100) ● Output sensor (SR2103) ● Figure 1-80 Stapler/stacker jam sensors SR2103 Output sensor SR2100…
-
Page 140: Residual Paper Jam
Residual paper jam Either one of the following sensors detects a paper-presence during the WAIT period when the product is turned on, when the door is closed, or when the product exits the power save mode: Inlet sensor ● Output sensor ●…
-
Page 141: Stapler
Stapler The stapler staples the printed pages. It consists of the staple cartridge and the stapler assembly. The staple cartridge holds up to 5,000 staples. The staple out sensor detects the presence of a staple. The staple ready sensor detects whether the staple is in the correct position to staple or not. The staple assembly is equipped with the stapler motor.
-
Page 142
Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW… -
Page 143: Solve Problems
Solve problems Solve problems checklist ● Helpful printed pages ● Preboot menu options ● Troubleshooting process ● Tools for troubleshooting ● Clear jams ● Solve paper-handling problems ● Use manual print modes ● Print quality troubleshooting tools ● Solve image-quality problems ●…
-
Page 144: Solve Problems Checklist
Print an internal page: Print a configuration page. If the product is connected to a network, an HP Jetdirect page ▲ also prints.
-
Page 145
● sure that you are using the print driver for this product. The print driver is on the CD that came with the product. You can also download the print driver from www.hp.com/go/ ljMFPM725_software. Print using a different program: Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution ▲… -
Page 146: Helpful Printed Pages
Helpful printed pages Menu map A printed Menu map can help you navigate the complete Administration menu more easily. To print a Menu map: From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. Open the following menus: Reports ●…
-
Page 147: Preboot Menu Options
2 Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost. HP does not recommend this action without contacting HP support first. Access the Preboot menu Turn the product on.
-
Page 148
Table 2-1 Preboot menu options (1 of 6) (continued) Menu option First level Second level Third level Description 3 Administrator This item navigates to the 3 Administrator sub menus. If authentication is required (and the user is not already signed in), the 2 Sign In displays. -
Page 149: Table 2-2 Preboot Menu Options (2 Of 6)
Table 2-2 Preboot menu options (2 of 6) Menu option First level Second level Third level Description 3 Administrator 6 Manage 1 Clear disk Select the 1 Clear disk item to enable an external device for Disk job storage. Job storage is normally enabled only for the continued Boot device.
-
Page 150: Table 2-3 Preboot Menu Options (3 Of 6)
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. The process erases the HP High Performance Secure Hard Disk. The disk becomes a non-encrypted disk. 3 Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.
-
Page 151: Table 2-4 Preboot Menu Options (4 Of 6)
Table 2-4 Preboot menu options (4 of 6) Menu option First level Second level Third level Description 3 Administrator 7 Configure Select the 7 Configure LAN item to setup the network settings for the Preboot menu firmware upgrade. continued The network can be configured to obtain the network settings from a DHCP server or as static.
-
Page 152: Table 2-6 Preboot Menu Options (6 Of 6)
Table 2-5 Preboot menu options (5 of 6) (continued) Menu option First level Second level Third level Description 3 Administrator 8 Startup 7 First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the product to Options initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on. continued continued For example, the user is prompted to configure first-time settings…
-
Page 153
The logs can be copied to a USB storage accessory when the product is initialized, and then these encrypted files can be sent to HP to help determine what is causing the problem. 3 Reset Password Use this item to reset the administrator password. -
Page 154: Troubleshooting Process
Troubleshooting process Determine the problem source Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction. Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues: Are supply items within their rated life? ●…
-
Page 155: Power Subsystem
Table 2-7 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued) Does the print-quality meet the customer’s Compare the images with the sample defects in the image defect requirements? tables. See the images defects table in the product service manual. Image quality After the print-quality is acceptable, see step 6. Can the customer print successfully from the Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a valid host computer?
-
Page 156: Control-Panel Checks
Make sure that the formatter is seated and operating correctly. Turn off the product and remove the formatter. Reinstall the formatter, and then verify that the heartbeat LED is blinking. Remove any external accessories or devices, and then try to turn the product on again. NOTE: If the control-panel display is blank, but the main cooling fan runs briefly after the product power is turned on, try printing an engine-test page to determine whether the problem is with the…
-
Page 157
Verifies that all areas respond to a touch Checks calibration Selects a test pattern to view on the display. Tests sounds Shows the firmware version Factory use only Only applicable for models with keyboards Adjusts the backlight Troubleshooting process ENWW… -
Page 158: Control-Panel Diagnostic Flowcharts
Checks the ambient light sensor Tests the home button Control-panel diagnostic flowcharts TIP: To open the diagnostic mode: Tilt the control panel forward. On the back side of the control panel, use a paperclip to press the button inside the small hole near the center of the control panel. Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.
-
Page 159: Touchscreen Black, White, Or Dim (No Image)
Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image) Figure 2-1 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image) Black display White display Dim display (no image) (no backlight (no image) or image) Is the Home button illuminated (bright white)? Is the product in bright Open the sunlight? diagnostic function.
-
Page 160: Touchscreen Is Slow To Respond Or Requires Multiple Presses To
Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond TIP: Use the red-grid touch test to verify that all areas of the touchscreen are correctly functioning. See Control-panel checks on page 124. Figure 2-2 Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond Touchscreen slow to respond or requires multiple presses…
-
Page 161: Touchscreen Has An Unresponsive Zone
Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone Figure 2-3 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone Is the area of the touchscreen you are touching greyed out (intentionally deactivated)? Open the diagnostic function. Perform the red-grid touch test. Does the control panel respond to a touch? Is the same area…
-
Page 162: No Control-Panel Sound
No control-panel sound Figure 2-4 No control-panel sound Control panel has no sound Open the following menus: Administration Display Settings Key Press Sound Select the following: Save Can sounds be heard? Open the diagnostic function. Perform the sound test. Can sounds be heard? Do not replace the control panel.
-
Page 163: Home Button Is Unresponsive
Home button is unresponsive Figure 2-5 Home button is unresponsive Home button unresponsive Open the diagnostic function. Perform the Home button test. Does the virtual LED illuminate green when the Home button is pressed? Turn the product power off, and then on again. Open the diagnostic function.
-
Page 164: Hardware Integration Pocket (Hip) Is Not Functioning (Control Panel Functional)
(control panel functional) Check that all installed hardware integration pocket devices are within HP specifications. The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to the port. If an installed device attempts to draw more power than is provided, the port is automatically disabled.
-
Page 165: Tools For Troubleshooting
NOTE: HP recommends fully troubleshooting the formatter and control panel before replacing either assembly. Use the heartbeat LED to troubleshoot formatter and control panel errors to avoid unnecessarily replacing these assemblies.
-
Page 166: Table 2-8 Heartbeat Led, Status
HP Jetdirect LEDs The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed.
-
Page 167: Engine Diagnostics
For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the product control-panel menus. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
-
Page 168: Figure 2-7 Locating The Engine-Test
Print the engine test pages NOTE: A damaged formatter might interfere with the engine test. If the engine test page does not print, try removing the formatter, and then perform the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is in the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them together.
-
Page 169
Print formatter test pages If the engine test was successful with the formatter removed, reinstall the formatter, and then print a configuration page to test the functionality of the formatter. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. -
Page 170: Paper Path Test
Paper path test This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams. To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path, and then specify the number of copies to print.
-
Page 171: Paper Path Sensor Tests
Paper path sensor tests This test displays the status of each paper-path sensor and allows viewing of sensor status while printing internal pages. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. Open the following menus: Troubleshooting ●…
-
Page 172: Manual Sensor Tests
Manual sensor tests Performs tests to determine whether the paper-path sensors are operating correctly. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. Open the following menus: Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests ● Manual Sensor Test ●…
-
Page 173
Table 2-10 Manual sensor tests (continued) Sensor or switch Sensor Replacement part Replacement part Paper-path sensor Testing of sensor name number number description test name Duplex switchback CF235-67913 Duplexer SR1 Duplexer Remove the duplexer, sensor switchback sensor insert a sheet of paper so that it covers the switchback sensor, and then reinstall the… -
Page 174: Cartridge Door Switch (Sw3)
Cartridge door switch (SW3) Open the cartridge door to activate the sensor. Figure 2-8 Test the cartridge door switch Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, make sure that the sensor-actuator tab on the door is not damaged or missing.
-
Page 175: Left Door Switch (Sw1)
Left door switch (SW1) Open the left door, gently release the door arm and lower the door until it is fully open, and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to activate the switch. Figure 2-9 Test the left door switch Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
-
Page 176: Right Door Sensor (Sr8)
Right door sensor (SR8) Open the right door, and then press the sensor. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, make sure that the sensor-actuator tab on the door is not damaged or missing. If necessary, replace the sensor. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 177: Cartridge Install Sensor (Sr1)
Cartridge install sensor (SR1) Open the cartridge door, remove the print cartridge, and then activate the sensor on the left side of the cartridge cavity. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If necessary, replace the sensor. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 178: Top (Top-Of-Page) Sensor (Sr9)
TOP (top-of-page) sensor (SR9) Open the cartridge door, and then remove the toner cartridge. Raise the registration shutter. Use a small screwdriver to activate the top sensor. Figure 2-10 Test the top sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the high-voltage power supply (HVPS).
-
Page 179: Fuser Loop Sensor (Sr6)
Fuser loop sensor (SR6) Open the cartridge door, and then remove the toner cartridge. Press the sensor lever to activate the sensor. Figure 2-11 Fuser loop sensor Check the control-panel display for a sensor response. If there is no response, replace the high-voltage power supply (HVPS). Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 180: Fuser Output Sensor (Sr12)
Fuser output sensor (SR12) Open the left door. Pull down the fuser shutter, and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to pull the sensor lever toward you. Figure 2-12 Fuser output sensor Check the control-panel display for a sensor response. If there is no response, replace the fuser.
-
Page 181: Duplex Switchback Sensor (Sr1)
Duplex switchback sensor (SR1) Remove the duplexer from the product. Insert a sheet of paper in the duplexer until the sheet covers the sensor. Figure 2-13 Duplex switchback sensor Reinstall the duplexer, and then check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the duplexer.
-
Page 182: Duplexer Refeed Sensor (Sr2)
Duplexer refeed sensor (SR2) Remove the duplexer from the product. Insert a sheet of paper in the duplexer until the sheet covers the sensor. Figure 2-14 Duplexer refeed sensor Reinstall the duplexer, and then check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the duplexer.
-
Page 183: Tray 4 Feed Sensor (Sr1)
Tray 4 feed sensor (SR1) Open the lower right door. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to activate the sensor. Figure 2-15 Tray 4 feed sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the paper pickup assembly. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 184: Output Sensor (Sr3)
Output sensor (SR3) Open the left door, and then press the output sensor lever. Figure 2-16 Output sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the paper delivery assembly. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 185: Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Tests
Tray/bin manual sensor tests Use this test to test paper-path sensors and the paper-size switches manually. The following illustrations and table show the locations of these sensors. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
-
Page 186
Table 2-11 Tray/bin manual sensor test (continued) Sensor or switch Sensor Replacement Replacement Paper-path Testing of sensor name number part number part description sensor test name Tray 4 paper- RM1-9415-000CN Tray 4 paper pick- SR3 Tray 4 paper Remove Tray 4, and presence sensor up assembly then push the sensor… -
Page 187: Base Product Trays
Base product trays Tray 1 paper sensor (SR1) Open Tray 1, push the sensor lever down, and hold it for 3 seconds to activate the sensor. Figure 2-17 Tray 1 paper sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the cartridge door assembly. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 188: Figure 2-18 Tray 2 Paper Sensor
Tray 2 Paper sensor (SR7) Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the sensor levers on the right side of the cavity to activate the sensor. Figure 2-18 Tray 2 paper sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the upper cassette pickup assembly.
-
Page 189: Figure 2-19 Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor
Tray 2 paper surface sensor (SR10) Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the sensor at the back of the tray cavity. Figure 2-19 Tray 2 paper surface sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 190: Figure 2-20 Tray 2 Paper Size Switches
Tray 2 paper size switches (SW4, SW6) Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the switches at the back of the tray cavity. Figure 2-20 Tray 2 paper size switches Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 191: Figure 2-21 Tray 3 Paper Sensor
Tray 3 paper sensor (SR5) Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the sensor lever on the right side of the cavity to activate the sensor. Figure 2-21 Tray 3 paper sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the lower cassette pickup assembly.
-
Page 192: Figure 2-22 Tray 3 Paper Surface Sensor
Tray 3 paper surface sensor (SR11) Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the sensor at the back of the tray cavity. Figure 2-22 Tray 3 paper surface sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 193: Figure 2-23 Tray 3 Paper Size Switches
Tray 3 paper size switches (SW5, SW7) Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the switches at the back of the tray cavity. Figure 2-23 Tray 3 paper size switches Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 194: Figure 2-24 Output Bin Full Sensor
Output bin full sensor (SR4) Raise and then lower the output-bin levers to activate the sensor. Figure 2-24 Output bin full sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the paper delivery assembly. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 195: Optional 500-Sheet Paper Tray (Tray 4)
Optional 500-sheet paper tray (Tray 4) Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) Remove the Tray 4 cassette, and then push the sensor lever on the right side of the cavity to activate the sensor. Figure 2-25 Tray 4 paper sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the paper pickup assembly.
-
Page 196: Figure 2-26 Tray 4 Paper Surface Sensor
Tray 4 paper surface (SR2) Remove Tray 4, and then press the sensor lever in the back right corner of the tray cavity to activate the sensor. Figure 2-26 Tray 4 paper surface sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly.
-
Page 197: Figure 2-27 Tray 4 Paper Size Switches
Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3) Remove Tray 4, and then push the switches at the back of the tray cavity. Figure 2-27 Tray 4 paper size switches Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 198: Figure 2-28 Tray 4 Feed Sensor
Tray 4 Feed sensor (SR1) Open the lower right door. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to activate the sensor. Figure 2-28 Tray 4 feed sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the Tray 4 paper pick-up assembly. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 199: Figure 2-29 Lower Right Door Sensor
Lower right door sensor (SW1) Open the lower right door, and then use a small screwdriver to activate the sensor. Figure 2-29 Lower right door sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the Tray 4 right door sensor. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 200: 1X500 And 3X500 Paper Deck Trays
1×500 and 3×500 paper deck trays Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) on page 163. Tray 4 paper surface sensor (SR2) Tray 4 paper surface (SR2) on page 164. Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3) Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3) on page 165.
-
Page 201: Figure 2-30 Test The Tray 4 Door Switch
Tray 4 door opening/closing door switch (SW1) NOTE: Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6 use the same door switch (SW1). Open and then close the paper-feeder door to ensure that the tab on the door (callout 1) activates the switch (callout 2). Figure 2-30 Test the Tray 4 door switch Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
-
Page 202
Tray 5 paper sensor (SR83) Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) on page 163. Tray 5 paper surface sensor (SR82) Tray 4 paper surface (SR2) on page 164. Tray 5 paper size switches (SW82, SW83) Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3) on page 165. -
Page 203
Tray 6 paper sensor (SR93) Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) on page 163. Tray 6 paper surface sensor (SR92) Tray 4 paper surface (SR2) on page 164. Tray 6 paper size switches (SW92, SW93) Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3) on page 165. -
Page 204: Hci Trays
HCI trays NOTE: For the purposes of this section, the tray numbers reflect a base unit with the HCI installed. If your product has an optional 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 4) installed, the tray numbers in this section will differ. In this section, Tray 4 refers to the right tray, and Tray 5 refers to the left tray. Tray 4 paper sensor (PS3103) Remove Tray 4 from the HCI.
-
Page 205: Figure 2-32 Tray 4 Paper Surface Sensor
Tray 4 paper surface sensor (PS3101 and PS3102) Remove Tray 4 from the HCI. In the tray cavity, in the upper right-hand corner, toggle the sensor lever. Figure 2-32 Tray 4 paper surface sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the paper pick-up assembly (right).
-
Page 206: Figure 2-33 Tray 4 Paper Size Sensor
Tray 4 paper size sensor (PS3303) Remove Tray 4 from the HCI. In the tray cavity, press and hold the tray presence switch (callout 1), and then lift the paper size sensor lever (callout 2). Figure 2-33 Tray 4 paper size sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
-
Page 207: Figure 2-34 Tray 4 Paper Feed Sensor
Tray 4 paper feed sensor (PS3302) Remove Tray 4 from the HCI. Place a business card between the feed roller and the separation roller as far as it will go to activate the feed sensor. Figure 2-34 Tray 4 paper feed sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
-
Page 208: Figure 2-35 Tray 4 Door Open Sensor
Tray 4 door open sensor (SW3301) Open the HCI right door. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to activate the door sensor. Figure 2-35 Tray 4 door open sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the crossing paper feed assembly. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 209: Figure 2-36 Tray 5 Paper Sensor
Tray 5 paper sensor (PS3203) Remove Tray 5 from the HCI. In the tray cavity, press and hold the tray presence switch (callout 1), and then lift the paper sensor lever (callout 2). Figure 2-36 Tray 5 paper sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the paper pick-up assembly (left).
-
Page 210: Figure 2-37 Tray Paper Surface Sensor
Tray paper surface sensor (PS3201 and PS3202) Remove Tray 5 from the HCI. At the back of the tray cavity, toggle the sensor lever. Figure 2-37 Tray paper surface sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the paper pick-up assembly (left). Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 211: Figure 2-38 Tray 5 Paper Size Sensor
Tray 5 paper size sensor (PS3304) Remove Tray 5 from the HCI. In the tray cavity, press and hold the tray presence switch (callout 1), and then lift the paper size sensor lever (callout 2). Figure 2-38 Tray 5 paper size sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
-
Page 212: Figure 2-39 Tray 5 Feed Sensor
Tray 5 feed sensor (PS3305) Remove Tray 5 from the HCI. Place a business card between the feed roller and the separation roller as far as it will go to activate the feed sensor. Figure 2-39 Tray 5 feed sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
-
Page 213: Scanner Sensor Tests
HCI exit sensor (PS3301) Open the HCI right door. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to lift the sensor lever (callout 2). Figure 2-40 HCI exit sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the crossing paper feed assembly. Scanner sensor tests Use these diagnostic tests to manually test the document feeder and scanner sensors.
-
Page 214
Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control-panel display to verify the sensor state (active or inactive). State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the ● sensor is active. Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the ●… -
Page 215: Print/Stop Test
Print/stop test Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams within the engine. During this test you can stop the paper anywhere along the product paper path. You can program the test to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position.
-
Page 216: Component Tests
Component tests Control-panel tests Open the following menus: Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests ● Available control-panel tests LEDs: test the LEDs on the control panel. ● Display: sequence through display tests. ● Buttons: test the key pad and other buttons. ●…
-
Page 217: Drum Rotation Test Check
Drum rotation test check NOTE: This test is especially important if refilled toner cartridges are in use. The photosensitive drum, which is located in the toner cartridge, must rotate in order for the print process to work. The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the main gear assembly. Use this procedure to determine whether the drum is rotating.
-
Page 218
Table 2-12 Component tests (continued) Component test Item Control-panel display Description message Clutch drive test Feed Roller Clutch Activates the main motor to activate the paper feeder pickup clutch for 10 seconds. Scanner motor test Laser Scanner Motor Activates the laser/scanner motor for 10 seconds. -
Page 219: Diagrams
Diagrams Block diagrams Figure 2-41 Product cross section Item Description Item Description Laser/scanner Duplex re-pickup roller Photosensitive drum Fuser film Toner cartridge Pressure roller Registration roller Duplex reverse roller Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup roller Fuser output roller Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) separation pad Upper cassette (Tray 2) Re-pickup roller Lower cassette (Tray 3)
-
Page 220: Figure 2-42 Optional Paper Feeder (Tray 3 And Tray 4) Cross Section
Item Description Item Description Cassette pickup roller Intermediate output roller Transfer roller Output roller Figure 2-42 Optional paper feeder (Tray 3 and Tray 4) cross section Item Description Pickup roller Feed roller Separation pad Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 221: Table 2-13 1X500-Sheet Paper Deck Cross Section
Figure 2-43 1×500-sheet paper deck cross section Table 2-13 1×500-sheet paper deck cross section Item Description Item Description Pickup roller Storage box Feed roller Cassette Separation roller Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 222: Table 2-14 3X500-Sheet Paper Deck Cross Section
Figure 2-44 3×500-sheet paper deck cross section Table 2-14 3×500-sheet paper deck cross section Item Description Item Description Pickup roller Separation roller Feed roller Cassette Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 223: Table 2-15 3,500-Sheet Hci Cross Section
Figure 2-45 3,500-sheet HCI cross section Table 2-15 3,500-sheet HCI cross section Item Description Item Description Pickup roller Right cassette Feed roller Left cassette Separation roller Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 224: Location Of Connectors
Location of connectors DC controller connections Figure 2-46 DC controller connections Item Description Item Description Item Description LVPS Right door sensor SR8 Paper deck LVPS Output sensor SR3 HVPS Output bin full sensor SR4 Rear fan FM1 Drum motor M1 HVPS Power switch Fuser motor M3…
-
Page 225: Plug/Jack Locations
Item Description Item Description Item Description Duplexer Lower cassette pickup clutch Upper cassette media end switch SW6 Lower cassette media out Lower cassette media end sensor SR5 switch SW7 Plug/jack locations Fax port Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) port (for connecting third-party devices) Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port Host USB port (for connecting third-party devices)
-
Page 226: Locations Of Major Components
Locations of major components Figure 2-47 Base product external components Item Description Item Description Toner-cartridge door Power receptacle Face-down output bin Rear cover Face-down output bin extension tray Test print switch Tray 1 Lower cassette Formatter Upper cassette Right door Front cover Left door Power switch…
-
Page 227: Figure 2-48 1X500-Sheet Paper Feeder External Components
Figure 2-48 1×500-sheet paper feeder external components Item Description Item Description Connector Positioning pins Right door Cassette Lock lever Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 228: Figure 2-49 1X500-Sheet Paper Deck External Components
Figure 2-49 1×500-sheet paper deck external components Item Description Item Description Connector Positioning pins Right door Front door Lock lever Cassette Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 229: Figure 2-50 3X500-Sheet Paper Deck External Components
Figure 2-50 3×500-sheet paper deck external components Item Description Item Description Connector Positioning pins Right door Cassettes Lock lever Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 230: Figure 2-51 3500-Sheet Paper Deck (Hci) External Components
Figure 2-51 3500-sheet paper deck (HCI) external components Item Description Item Description Connector Positioning pins Right door Right cassette Lock lever Left cassette Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 231: Figure 2-52 Duplexer External Components
Figure 2-52 Duplexer external components Item Description Item Description Connector Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 232: Figure 2-53 Stapler/Stacker External Components
Figure 2-53 Stapler/stacker external components Item Description Item Description Jogger guide Output bin extension tray Stapler door Output bin Left door Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 233: Figure 2-54 Major Component Locations (1 Of 3)
Figure 2-54 Major component locations (1 of 3) Item Description Item Description Output assembly Lower cassette pickup assembly Feed assembly Toner-cartridge door assembly Registration assembly Fuser Upper cassette pickup assembly Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 234: Figure 2-55 Major Component Locations (2 Of 3)
Figure 2-55 Major component locations (2 of 3) Item Description Item Description Laser/scanner assembly Lifter drive assembly Main drive assembly Fuser drive assembly Figure 2-56 Major component locations (3 of 3) Item Description Formatter Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 235: Figure 2-57 Pca Component Locations
Figure 2-57 PCA component locations Item Description Item Description Low-voltage power supply High-voltage power supply DC controller Connector PCA Figure 2-58 Motor locations Item Description Item Description Scanner motor Lower cassette lifter motor Drum motor Fuser motor Upper cassette lifter motor Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 236: Figure 2-59 Fan Locations
Figure 2-59 Fan locations Item Description Rear fan Front fan Fuser fan Figure 2-60 Roller locations Item Description Item Description Tray 1 pickup roller Lower cassette pickup roller Tray 1 separation pad Upper cassette pickup roller Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 237: Figure 2-61 Sensor Locations (Base Product)
Item Description Item Description Upper cassette separation roller Transfer roller Lower cassette separation roller Figure 2-61 Sensor locations (base product) Item Description Item Description Output bin media-full sensor Lower cassette lift-up sensor Upper cassette lift-up sensor Cartridge presence sensor TOP sensor Environmental sensor Tray 1 media-out sensor Loop sensor…
-
Page 238: Figure 2-62 Switch Locations (Base Product)
Figure 2-62 Switch locations (base product) Item Description Item Description Left door interlock switch Lower cassette media-width switch Cartridge door-open detection switch Lower cassette media-end switch Test print switch Upper cassette media-end switch Cartridge door interlock switch Power switch Upper cassette media-width switch Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 239: Figure 2-63 Solenoid Location (Base Product)
Figure 2-63 Solenoid location (base product) Item Description Tray 1 pickup solenoid Figure 2-64 Clutch location (base product) Item Description Upper cassette pickup clutch Lower cassette pickup clutch Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 240: Figure 2-65 1X500 Paper Feeder Internal Component Locations
Figure 2-65 1×500 paper feeder internal component locations Item Description Item Description Cassette pickup motor Cassette separation roller Lifter drive assembly Cassette feed roller Controller PCA Cassette pickup roller Cassette pickup assembly Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 241: Figure 2-66 1X500 Paper Deck Internal Component Locations
Figure 2-66 1×500 paper deck internal component locations Item Description Item Description Cassette separation roller Cassette lifter drive assembly Cassette pickup roller Controller PCA Cassette feed roller Cassette pickup assembly Cassette pickup motor Storage box assembly Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 242: Figure 2-67 3X500 Paper Deck Internal Component Locations
Figure 2-67 3×500 paper deck internal component locations Item Description Item Description Cassette separation rollers Lifter drive assemblies Cassette pickup rollers Controller PCAs Cassette feed rollers Cassette pickup assemblies Cassette pickup motors Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 243: Figure 2-68 3500-Sheet Paper Deck (Hci) Internal Component Locations (1 Of 2)
Figure 2-68 3500-sheet paper deck (HCI) internal component locations (1 of 2) Item Description Left cassette pickup assembly Right cassette pickup assembly Controller PCA Merge assembly Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 244: Figure 2-69 3500-Sheet Paper Deck (Hci) Internal Component Locations (2 Of 2)
Figure 2-69 3500-sheet paper deck (HCI) internal component locations (2 of 2) Item Description Item Description Left cassette pickup drive assembly Right cassette lifter drive assembly Left cassette pickup motor Right cassette automatic close assembly Right cassette pickup drive assembly Left cassette automatic close assembly Right cassette pickup motor Left cassette lifter drive assembly…
-
Page 245: Figure 2-70 Stapler/Stacker Internal Component Locations
Figure 2-70 Stapler/stacker internal component locations Item Description Alignment assembly Controller PCA Feed assembly Stapler assembly Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 246: General Timing Charts
General timing charts Figure 2-71 General timing chart Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 247: Circuit Diagrams
Circuit diagrams Figure 2-72 General circuit diagram (1 of 2) 10 9 J1DWH B10 A10 J1DA J1DB +24VD +24VC J903 Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 248: Figure 2-73 General Circuit Diagram (2 Of 2)
Figure 2-73 General circuit diagram (2 of 2) Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 249: Internal Print-Quality Test Pages
Internal print-quality test pages Clean the paper path From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button. Open the following menus: Calibration/Cleaning ● Cleaning Page ● Touch the Print button to print the page. The cleaning process can take several minutes.
-
Page 250: Print A Configuration Page
Print button to print the pages. Figure 2-74 Configuration page Configuration Page Page 1 Device information Installed personalities and options HP Web services Memory Event log Security Paper trays and options Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 251: Hp Embedded Jetdirect Page
HP embedded Jetdirect page The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following information: Always make sure the status line under the general information line indicates «I/O Card Ready.» Figure 2-75 HP embedded Jetdirect page…
-
Page 252: Finding Important Information On The Configuration Pages
“Installed Personalities and All optional devices that are installed on the Options.” Shows model and capacity. product should be listed on the main Embedded HP Jetdirect Look on the main configuration page, configuration page. under “Installed Personalities and In addition, separate pages print for the Options.”…
-
Page 253: Control Panel Menus
You can perform basic product setup by using the Administration menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for more advanced product setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the product IP address or host name in the address bar of a Web browser. Reports menu…
-
Page 254
Table 2-17 Reports menu (continued) First level Second level Values Description Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web Services for the product. View Fax Reports Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received View by this product. -
Page 255: General Settings Menu
General Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the General Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-18 General Settings menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values…
-
Page 256
Table 2-18 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Event Type Wake Select whether to add or edit a Wake Sleep event or a Sleep event, and then select the time and the days for the wake or sleep event. -
Page 257
Table 2-18 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Print Quality Image Registration Adjust Tray <X> Print Test Page Shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and from left to right. -
Page 258
Table 2-18 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description X1 Shift -5.00 mm to 5.00 The direction that is perpendicular to the Y1 Shift way the paper passes through the X2 Shift product is referred to as X. -
Page 259
Table 2-18 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Resistance Mode Normal Use this setting to correct print quality problems in low- humidity Down environments and highly resistive paper. Use the option to solve print quality problems that are related to poor toner-transfer. -
Page 260
Table 2-18 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Economode Toner density Default Lighter print Darker print Jam Recovery Auto* This product provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages. Select one of the following options: Auto: The product attempts to reprint… -
Page 261
Table 2-18 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Manage Stored Jobs Sort Stored Jobs By Name* This option allows you list the jobs Date either Alphabetically or Chronologically. Quick Copy Job Held Off* Sets a maximum Timeout… -
Page 262
Table 2-18 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Hold Off Print Job Enabled* Enable this feature if you want to prevent Disabled print jobs from starting while a user is initiating a copy job from the control panel. -
Page 263: Copy Settings Menu
Copy Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Copy Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-19 Copy Settings menu First level Second level Third level Values Description…
-
Page 264
Table 2-19 Copy Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description 2-Sided Format Book-style If you are making two- sided copies, select a 2- Flip-style sided format option. Book-style original; Flip- Book-style: The back side style copy of the original is printed right-side-up, and the Flip-style original;… -
Page 265
Table 2-19 Copy Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description Collate Collate on (Sets in page If you are making more order)* than one copy, select the Collate on (Sets in page Collate off (Pages order) option to assemble grouped) the pages in the correct… -
Page 266
Table 2-19 Copy Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description Image Adjustment Darkness Select a value using the Use to improve the overall slide bar, or touch quality of the copy. Automatic. Adjust the Darkness setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors. -
Page 267
Table 2-19 Copy Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description 2-Sided Format Book-style If you are making two- sided copies, select a 2- Flip-style sided format option. Book-style original; Flip- Book-style: The back side style copy of the original is printed right-side-up, and the Flip-style original;… -
Page 268
Table 2-19 Copy Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description Optimize Text/Picture Manually adjust* Optimize For slider Use this setting to optimize the output for a particular type of content. Text Manually adjust: Use to manually optimize the Printed picture setting for each document. -
Page 269
Table 2-19 Copy Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description Booklet Format Booklet Booklet off Use to copy two or more pages onto one sheet of Booklet on paper so you can fold the sheets in the center to form a booklet. -
Page 270: Scan/Digital Send Settings Menu
To open the product HP Embedded Web Server and set up the email notification server, enter the product IP address into a Web browser. Chapter 2 Solve problems…
-
Page 271
Disable preview options when creating the job, the default options are used. For complete setup, go to the HP Embedded Web Server by typing the IP address of the product into a Web browser. Use the… -
Page 272
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Default File Name The product is shipped with a factory default file name of [Untitled] for any scanned files that are sent or saved. -
Page 273
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Document File Type Select from a list of provides the best file types. overall image and text quality. JPEG is a good choice for most graphics. -
Page 274
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Optimize Text/ Manually adjust* Use to optimize the Picture output for a Text particular type of content. You can Printed picture optimize the output for text, printed Photograph pictures, or a… -
Page 275
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Original Sides 1-sided Use to describe the layout for each side 2-sided of the original document. First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides. -
Page 276
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description 2-Sided Format Book-style Book-style: The back side of the original is Flip-style printed right-side-up, and the back side of the copy is printed the same way. -
Page 277
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Content Orientation Orientation Auto detect For some features to work correctly, you Portrait* must specify the way the content of the Landscape original document is placed on the page. -
Page 278
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Color/Black Automatically Use to enable or detect* disable color scanning. Color Automatically detect: Black/Gray Automatically scans documents in color if Black at least one page has color. -
Page 279
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Notification E-mail E-mail: Select to address receive the notification in an email. Touch the text box following E-mail Address, and then type the email address for the notification. -
Page 280
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Job Build Job Build off* Use to combine several original Job Build on documents into one job. Also use to scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can… -
Page 281
Setup Digital Sending product interacts with Disabled Software (DSS) the HP Digital Server Sending Software (DSS) server. HP DSS handles digital sending tasks, such as faxing, emailing, and sending scanned documents to a network folder or USB storage device. Use the… -
Page 282: Fax Settings Menu
Wizard feature to set up options for faxing. NOTE: To set up LAN fax or Internet fax, use the HP Embedded Web Server. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, type the product network address into a Web browser. To…
-
Page 283
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Redial on No Range: 0 – 2 Answer Default = 0 Redial on Busy Range: 0 – 9 Default = 3 General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature is… -
Page 284
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Billing Codes Enable Billing Codes When billing codes are enabled, a prompt displays that asks the user to enter the billing code for an outgoing fax. This prompt does not appear if the Allow… -
Page 285
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Default Job Options Image Preview Make optional* Use the Image Preview feature to Require preview scan a document and display a Disable preview preview before completing the job. -
Page 286
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe the layout for each side 2-sided of the original document. First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides. -
Page 287
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description 2-Sided Format Book-style* Book-style: The back side of the original is Flip-style printed right-side-up, and the back side of the copy is printed the same way. Use this option for originals and copies that are bound along… -
Page 288
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Include Thumbnail When sending an analog fax, select Include Thumbnail receive a thumbnail image of the first page of the fax in your notification. Notification E-mail Provide the email address… -
Page 289
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the overall quality of the copy. Adjust the Darkness setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors. -
Page 290
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Optimize Text/ Manually adjust* Optimize For Optimizes the output Picture for a particular type Text of content. You can optimize the output Printed picture for text, printed pictures, or a Photograph… -
Page 291
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Fax Receive Settings Fax Receive Setup Ringer Volume Use to configure settings for receiving Low* faxes. High Rings To Answer Range: 1–6 Default = 1 Fax Receive Speed Fast* Medium… -
Page 292
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Blocked Fax Fax Number to Block The blocked fax list Numbers can contain up to 30 numbers. When the product receives a call from one of the blocked fax numbers, it deletes the incoming fax. -
Page 293
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Default Job Options Notification Do not notify* Configure to receive notification about the Notify when job status of a sent completes document. Notify only if job Do not notify: Turns fails… -
Page 294
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Fit to Page Enabled* Use to shrink faxes that are larger than Disabled Letter-size or A4-size so that they can fit onto a Letter-size or A4-size page. -
Page 295: General Print Settings Menu
General Print Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the General Print Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-22 General Print Settings menu First level Second level Values…
-
Page 296
Table 2-22 General Print Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Values Description Form Length Range: 5 – 128 Controls the PCL print-command options. PCL is a set of Default = 60 productcommands that Hewlett- Packard developed to provide access to productfeatures. Use the Form Length feature to… -
Page 297
The following options are available: Standard: Tray numbering is based on newer HP LaserJet models. Classic: Tray numbering is based on HP LaserJet 4 and older models. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW… -
Page 298: Default Print Options Menu
Default Print Options menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Default Print Options menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-23 Default Print Options menu First level Second level Values…
-
Page 299
Table 2-23 Default Print Options menu (continued) First level Second level Values Description 2-Sided Format Book-style* Configures the default style for 2- sided print jobs. If the Book-style Flip-style option is selected, the back side of the page is printed the right way up. -
Page 300: Display Settings Menu
Display Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Display Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-24 Display Settings menu First level Second level Values Description Key Press Sound…
-
Page 301
Table 2-24 Display Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Values Description Clearable Warnings Use this feature to set the period that a clearable warning Job* displays on the control panel. If setting is selected, clearable warnings appear until Clearable Warnings button is pressed. -
Page 302: Manage Supplies Menu
Manage Supplies menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Manage Supplies menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-25 Manage Supplies menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values…
-
Page 303
Table 2-25 Manage Supplies menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Very Low Settings Stop Configure how the product responds Prompt to continue* when the document feeder kit is reaching Continue the end of its estimated life. -
Page 304
Table 2-25 Manage Supplies menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Supply Messages Low Message Use to configure whether a message displays on the control panel when supplies are getting low, but have not yet reached the low threshold. -
Page 305: Manage Trays Menu
Manage Trays menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Manage Trays menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-26 Manage Trays menu First level Values Description Use Requested Tray Exclusively*…
-
Page 306
Table 2-26 Manage Trays menu (continued) First level Values Description Use Another Tray Enabled* Use to turn on or off the control-panel prompt to select another tray when the specified tray Disabled is empty. Two options are available: Enabled: When this option is selected, the user is prompted either to add paper to the selected tray or to choose a different tray. -
Page 307: Network Settings Menu
Jetdirect Menu See the table that follows for details. These menus have the same structure. If an additional HP Jetdirect network card is installed in the EIO slot, then both menus are available. Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu…
-
Page 308
Values Description IPV4 Settings Config Method Bootp Specifies the method that TCP/IPv4 DHCP* parameters will be configured on the Auto IP HP Jetdirect print server. Manual Bootp (Bootstrap Protocol): Use for automatic configuration from a BootP server. DHCP (Dynamic Host… -
Page 309
Auto IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set. Legacy: The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent with older HP Jetdirect products. Primary DNS Range: 0 – 255 Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of Default = a Primary Domain xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System (DNS) Server. -
Page 310
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified Router Specified: The stateful auto- Router Unavailable* configuration method to be used by the Always print server is determined by a router. -
Page 311
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Proxy Server Select from a Specifies the proxy provided list. server to be used by embedded applications in the product. A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access. -
Page 312
Fourth level Values Description Security Secure Web HTTPS Required* For configuration management, specify HTTPS Optional whether the HP Embedded Web Server will accept communications using HTTPS (Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and HTTPS. HTTPS Required: For secure, encrypted communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. -
Page 313
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Reset Security Specify whether the current security settings on the print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults. Yes: Security settings are reset to factory defaults. -
Page 314
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Diagnostics Embedded Tests LAN HW Test Provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems. Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault is internal or external to the product. -
Page 315
Data Path Test This test helps to identify data path and corruption problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation product. It sends a predefined PS file to the product, However, the test is paperless; the file will not print. -
Page 316
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Execution Time [H] Range: 1 – 24 hours Specify the length of time (in hours) that Default = 1 hour an embedded test will be run. If you select zero (0), the test runs indefinitely until an error occurs… -
Page 317
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Timeout Default = 001 Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait for a response from the remote host. The maximum is 100. Default = 004 Count Specify the number of ping test packets… -
Page 318
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description RTT Min Default = 0000 Shows the minimum detected roundtrip- time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. RTT Max Default = 0000 Shows the maximum detected roundtrip- time (RTT), from 0 to… -
Page 319
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Link Speed Auto* The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network. The available settings depend on the product and installed print server. -
Page 320
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description 100TX Full Limits auto- negotiation to a maximum link speed of 100 Mbps. 100TX Auto 1000 Mbps, full- duplex operation. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW… -
Page 321: Troubleshooting Menu
Troubleshooting menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Troubleshooting menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-29 Troubleshooting menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description…
-
Page 322
Table 2-29 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Used by a technician to evaluate and Diagnostic diagnose fax issues by listening to the sounds of fax modulations. Fax Log Entries The standard fax log includes basic Off*… -
Page 323
Table 2-29 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Number of Copies Range: 1–500 Sets the default number of copies for Default = 1 a copy job. This default applies when the Copy or Quick Copy function is initiated from the product Home… -
Page 324
Table 2-29 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Component Test Select from a list of Use to exercise available individual parts components. independently to isolate noise, leaking, or other issues. To start the test, select one of the components. -
Page 325: Device Maintenance Menu
Device Maintenance menu Backup/Restore menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the Backup/Restore menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-30 Backup/Restore menu First level Second level Third level Values…
-
Page 326: Calibration/Cleaning Menu
Calibration/Cleaning menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibration/Cleaning menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-31 Calibration/Cleaning menu First level Second level Values Description Cleaning Settings Auto Cleaning…
-
Page 327: Usb Firmware Upgrade Menu
USB Firmware Upgrade menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the USB Firmware Upgrade menu. Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and then follow the on- screen instructions.
-
Page 328: Interpret Control-Panel Messages
Interpret control-panel messages Control-panel message types The control-panel messages and event code errors indicate the current product status or situations that might require action. NOTE: Event log errors may or may not appear on the control-panel display. Access the event log to view or print the event log errors.
-
Page 329: D1 Jam In Upper Left Door
13.80.D1 Jam in upper left door Description Input delay jam. Paper did not arrive at the jam inlet sensor (SR2100). Recommended action Open the upper left door Remove all paper found. Close the upper left door. If the error persists, replace the stapler/stacker paper feed assembly. 13.80.FF Jam in upper left door Description Input initial jam.
-
Page 330: Jam In Stapler
Recommended action Remove all paper from the stacker bin area. Open the upper left door. Remove all paper found. Lower the stacker bin if it is in up position, and then close the upper left door. If the error persists, replace the stapler/stacker alignment assembly. 13.89.31 Jam in Stapler Description Staple jam.
-
Page 331: A4.D4 Jam In Tray 4
Use the Components tests to toggle the Tray 4 solenoid (listen for the solenoid to move). If the solenoid is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 4 paper pickup assembly. Use the Components tests to activate the Tray 4 pickup motor (listen for the motor to rotate). If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 4 pickup motor.
-
Page 332: A4.D5 Jam In Middle Right Door
Recommended action 3×500 paper deck installed. Open the lower right door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the lower right door. Inspect the Tray 5 pick, feed and separation rollers. Clean or replace them if necessary. Check the connectors at the feed sensor, solenoid, feed motor, and the controller PCA. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 5 feed sensor.
-
Page 333: A4.D6 Jam In Lower Right Door
13.A4.D6 Jam in lower right door Description This jam occurs when the leading edge of the sheet exits the source tray, but does not reach the Tray 4 feed sensor (SR1PD) in the designated amount of time. Recommended action 3×500 paper deck installed. Open the lower right door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the lower right door.
-
Page 334: A4.Ff Jam In Tray 4 Or 13.A4.Ff Jam In Lower Right Door Or 13.A4.Ff Jam In Middle Right Door
Use the Components tests to activate the Tray 6 pickup motor (listen for the motor to rotate). If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 pickup motor. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 4 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever are not properly functioning, replace the HCI paper pickup assembly.
-
Page 335: A5.D6 Jam In Lower Right Door
Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 5 feed sensor and HCI exit media feed sensor (PS3301). If the Tray 5 feed sensor or lever are not properly functioning, replace the Tray 5 paper pickup assembly. If the HCI media feed sensor is not properly functioning, replace the HCI crossing paper feed assembly.
-
Page 336: A6.D6 Jam In Tray 6
Recommended action Open the appropriate door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the door. Check for jammed paper in Tray 5 and the HCI right tray inner flap. Inspect the connectors at the feed sensor and controller PCA for Tray 5. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 5 feed sensor and HCI exit media feed sensor (PS3301).
-
Page 337: A7.D5 Jam In Lower Right Door
Recommended action Open Tray 5 and the inner flap, remove any jammed paper, and then close Tray 5 and the inner flap. Inspect the connectors at the feed sensor and controller PCA for Tray 6. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 6 feed sensor. If the Tray 6 feed sensor or lever are not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 paper pickup assembly.
-
Page 338: A7.D6 Jam Tray 5 (Inner Flap)
13.A7.D6 Jam tray 5 (inner flap) Description This jam occurs when the leading edge passes the tray 6 feed sensor (PS3305), but does not reach the HCI exit sensor (PS3301) in the designated amount of time. Recommended action 1×500 paper feeder and HCI installed. Open Tray 5 and the inner flap, remove any jammed paper, and then close Tray 5 and the inner flap.
-
Page 339: Ab.ee Door Open Jam
Lower right cover 2 open; AC ◦ Lower right cover 3 open; AD ◦ Recommended action Close the upper right door. Check the tab of the upper right door that engages the right door sensor. If it is damaged, replace the right door assembly.
-
Page 340: Ad.ee Door Open Jam
Recommended action Close the lower right door or HCI inner flap. Depending on input tray configuration, check the tab of the HCI lower right door that engages the door sensor (SW3301). If it is damaged, replace the door assembly. Check the HCI inner flap door (above right HCI tray) to verify that it properly opens and closes. Use the Manual sensor tests menu to toggle the lower right door (Tray 4/5) sensors.
-
Page 341: B2.Ax Jam In Top Cover Area
Make sure that the transfer roller is seated properly and not worn or deformed. Replace the transfer roller if necessary. Make sure that the registration assembly shutter is properly functioning. Replace the registration assembly if necessary. Check the toner cartridge for damage. Replace the cartridge if necessary. Use the Manual sensor tests to toggle the TOP sensor (SR9).
-
Page 342: B2.D1 Jam In Tray 1
Check the toner cartridge for damage. Replace the cartridge if necessary. Use the Manual sensor tests to toggle the TOP sensor (SR9). If the sensor is not properly functioning, replace the high-voltage power supply. Inspect the connector (J62) on the DC controller PCA, and connector (J901) on the high-voltage power supply.
-
Page 343: B2.D3 Jam In Top Cover Area (Tray 3) (No Optional Input Devices Installed)
Recommended action Open the top cover, remove any jammed paper, and then close the top cover. IMPORTANT: Do not remove the toner cartridge. Make sure that you remove any jammed paper from the top cover area before proceeding to avoid tearing partially picked paper. Open Tray 2, remove any jammed paper, and then close Tray 2 and the top cover.
-
Page 344: B2.D3 Jam In Top Cover Area (Tray 3) (Optional Input Devices Installed)
Use the Manual sensor tests to toggle the TOP sensor (SR9). If the sensor is not properly functioning, replace the high-voltage power supply. Inspect the connector (J48) on the DC controller PCA, and connector (J63) on the Tray 3 lower clutch.
-
Page 345: B2.Dx Jam In Top Cover Area
Recommended action Open the top cover, remove any jammed paper, and then close the top cover. NOTE: Do not remove the toner cartridge. Make sure that the duplexer is seated properly and check for obstructions in the paper path. Use the Components tests to activate the duplex feed motor (listen for the motor to rotate). If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the duplexer.
-
Page 346: B2.Ff Jam In Top Cover Area
Make sure that the registration assembly shutter is properly functioning. Replace the registration assembly if necessary. Use the Components tests to activate the pickup motor and the pickup solenoid/clutch (listen for the motor/solenoid to rotate/move) for the source tray. If the motor or solenoid are not properly functioning, replace the motor or solenoid.
-
Page 347: B9.Ax Fuser Area Jam
13.B9.AX Fuser area jam Description Fuser or duplexer stay jam. This jam occurs when the engine detects a paper stay jam at the fuser output sensor (SR12). Most likely there is an accordion jam in the fuser exit path. X indicates the fuser mode 2 = Normal ◦…
-
Page 348: B9.Dd Fuser Area Jam (Top Cover)
D = Envelope 1 ◦ D = Envelope 2 ◦ Recommended action Remove the duplexer (if installed). Remove the left door, and then remove the fuser. Remove any jammed paper from the fuser, and then reinstall the fuser. NOTE: Remove any other jammed paper from the fuser area. Reinstall the left door, and duplexer (if removed).
-
Page 349: B9.Ff Jam In Left Door
DC controller, J6 and J47 ● High-voltage power supply, J902 ● Use the Components tests to activate the duplex feed motor (listen for the motor to rotate). If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the duplexer. 13.B9.FF Jam in left door Description Fuser exit sensor (SR12) residual jam.
-
Page 350: D1.Ff Jam In Left Door
X indicates the fuser mode 2 = Normal ◦ 3 = Light media 1 ◦ 3 = Light media 2 ◦ 4 = Heavy media 1 ◦ 5 = Heavy media 2 ◦ B = Transparency ◦ D = Envelope 1 ◦…
-
Page 351: D3.Dx Jam In Duplexer
Recommended action Open the top cover, remove any jammed paper, and then close the top cover. 13.D3.DX Jam in duplexer Description Late to duplex exit jam. This jam occurs when the leading edge of the paper reaches the duplex switchback sensor (SR1DU), but fails to reach the duplex reefed sensor (SR2DU). The leading edge is in the duplexer, but the trailing edge might be accessible from the left door.
-
Page 352: De.ee Jam In Duplexer (During A Print Job)
Recommended action Open the top cover, remove any jammed paper, and then close the top cover. Remove the duplexer, remove any jammed paper, and then reinstall the duplexer. NOTE: Make sure that the duplexer is fully seated when reinstalled. Use the Manual sensor tests to toggle the duplexer refeed sensor (SR2DU). If the sensor or lever are not properly functioning, replace the duplexer.
-
Page 353: E1.Ff Jam In Left Door
13.E1.FF Jam in left door Description Power on residual paper jam. This jam occurs when paper exists at any of the paper path jam sensors when the product power is turned on or after jam re-evaluation. Recommended action Open the left door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the left door. Inspect the connectors on the paper delivery assembly.
-
Page 354: E6.Bd Jam In Left Door
13.E6.BD Jam in left door Description Multi-feed from duplexer jam. This jam occurs when the engine detects a multi-feed in the output path from the duplexer. Recommended action Check the paper path and rollers at the fuser and the duplexer for damage or wear. Replace the fuser or duplexer if necessary.
-
Page 355: E6.Ff
5 = Heavy media 2 ◦ B = Transparency ◦ D = Envelope 1 ◦ D = Envelope 2 ◦ Recommended action Open the left door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the left door. Inspect the connector (J55) on the output assembly, and the connector (J45) on the DC controller PCA.
-
Page 356: Ff.ff
13.FF.FF Description Power on residual paper jam; multiple sensors. This jam occurs when paper exists at any of the paper path jam sensors when the product power is turned on or after jam re-evaluation. Recommended action Multiple sensors are blocked. See the steps for other 13.XX.FF errors to clear this error. 13.WX.YZ Fuser area jam (top cover) Description Fuser delay jam from Tray 1-6.
-
Page 357: Insufficient Memory: To Continue, Touch «Ok
DC controller, J6 and J47 ● High-voltage power supply, J902 ● Use the Components tests to activate the fuser drive motor (listen for the motor to rotate). If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the fuser. 20.00.00 Insufficient memory: <Device> To continue, touch “OK” Description The product has experienced a memory error.
-
Page 358
30.01.08 Description The flatbed optical assembly cannot find the origin notch. Recommended action This is an informational message, and no action is required. If the flatbed optical assembly cannot find the origin notch on the flatbed scanner, the scanned image might be offset on the copied page. The image displacement will be less then 1 mm or pixel off. -
Page 359
30.01.44 Description A scanner firmware error has occurred. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. Upgrade the firmware. Replace the scanner control board. Replace the formatter. 30.01.45 Description General code assert error for the copy processor board firmware. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. -
Page 360
Recommended action This is an informational message, and no action is required. 30.03.20 Description The copy processor board firmware cannot communicate with the PCA on the optical assembly. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. Verify the FFC cables between scanner and scanner control board are connected. Replace the scanner. -
Page 361
30.03.30 Description The scanner control board cannot communicate with the flatbed scanner motor. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. As the product turns on, verify the scan head moves. Verify the drive belt is in the correct position. Check for a red LED illuminated on the scanner motor. -
Page 362
Recommended action Verify the paper meets the product specifications. Make sure the input tray is not overloaded. Check the event log for document feeder errors, and resolve any errors first. Open and close the top cover to see if the pick motor turns without posting this error. If the motor turns, then the motor is good. -
Page 363
31.08.A1 Description An initialization occurred after an abnormal product shutdown. Recommended action No action necessary. 31.08.A2 Description A normal shutdown has occurred. Recommended action No action necessary. 31.08.A3 Description A normal initialization has occurred. Recommended action No action necessary. 31.13.01 Description Paper pick was initiated, but the page didn’t make it to the pick success sensor. -
Page 364
Clean the document feeder roller. Open the following menus: Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests ● Scanner Tests ● Actuate the Pick-success Sensor. If the sensor does not show functionality when tested, replace the Document feeder. 31.13.02 Description The paper passed the pick success sensor and then jammed in the document feeder paper path. Recommended action Clear the paper path and try feeding the page again. -
Page 365
Verify the flag is not broken off. Open the following menus: Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests ● Scanner Tests ● Actuate the ADF Jam Cover Sensor. If the sensor does not show functionality when tested, replace the document feeder. 31.13.14 Description This is a feed jam in the document feeder, and the motor is not turning. -
Page 366: C.xx
Backup is from newer version of firmware than what is currently on the product. 32.1C.0C (event code) ◦ Backup canceled from the HP Embedded Web Server. 32.1C.0D (event code) ◦ Backup/restore failed, auto-reboot failed, or the product might be busy.
-
Page 367
32.1C.11 (event code) ◦ Backup/restore time-out while communicating with the engine. 32.1C.12 (event code) ◦ Backup/restore time-out while communicating with the disk. 32.1C.13 (event code) ◦ Scheduled backup failure. 32.1C.14 (event code) ◦ NVRAM restore time-out while communicating with the formatter. 32.1C.17 (event code) ◦… -
Page 368
32.1C.23 (event code) ◦ Failed to restore address book subsystem. 32.1C.24 (event code) ◦ NVRAM backup/restore successful. 32.1C.25 (event code) ◦ Copy subsystem reset failed. 32.1C.26 (event code) ◦ Fax subsystem reset failed. 32.1C.27 (event code) ◦ Digital Send subsystem reset failed. 32.1C.28 (event code) ◦… -
Page 369
No action necessary 32.1C.06 (event code) ◦ Retry 32.1C.07 (event code) ◦ Retry 32.1C.08 (event code) ◦ Remove stored jobs and retry Use larger capacity storage device Check network share 32.1C.09 (event code) ◦ Use a valid backup file 32.1C.0A (event code) ◦… -
Page 370
Turn the product off, and then on and retry 32.1C.17 (event code) ◦ Turn the product off, and then on and retry 32.1C.1B (event code) ◦ Turn the product off, and then on and retry 32.1C.1C (event code) ◦ Turn the product off, and then on and retry 32.1C.21 (event code) ◦… -
Page 371
Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on and retry. If the error persists, clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 33.01.01 Description Read back data from ICB and pass to SR clients so that they can recover occurred Information. Recommended action This is an informational message, and no action is required. -
Page 372
Recommended action This is an informational message, and no action is required. 33.02.01 Description A used part with data was replaced in the device. Used board/disk installed. Recommended action Turn the product power off, and then on again. If the error persists, please escalate this problem to your Global Business unit. 33.02.02 Description A Save/Recover status error has occurred on the product and one, or both, of the Save/Recover… -
Page 373: Wx.yz Used Board/Disk Installed
Some data might be lost. Check the host configuration. 40.00.02 Embedded I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” Description Too much data was sent to the embedded HP Jetdirect print server. An incorrect communications protocol might be in use. Recommended action Press the button to print the transferred data.
-
Page 374: Eio Buffer Overflow To Continue, Touch «Ok
40.00.03 EIO <X> buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” Description The product displays this message when the EIO card in the indicated slot has overflowed its I/O buffer during a busy state. Recommended action Press the button to continue. 40.00.04 EIO <X> bad transmission To continue, touch “OK” Description The product displays this message when a connection with the card in the indicated slot has been abnormally broken.
-
Page 375: Yz Unexpected Size In Tray
41.03.YZ Unexpected size in Tray <X> Description The product detected a different paper size than expected. Y = Size mismatch, Z = Source Y = 0: Detected paper is longer or shorter than expected ◦ Y = A: Detected paper too long ◦…
-
Page 376: Yz Unexpected Type In Tray
41.05.YZ Unexpected type in Tray <X> Description The product detected a different paper type than expected. Y = Expected type, Z = Detected type Y = 0: Unknown ◦ Y = 1: Normal paper ◦ Y = 3: LBP transparency ◦…
-
Page 377: Yz Unexpected Type In Tray To Use Another Tray, Touch «Options
Recommended action Load the tray with the size and type of paper indicated, or use another tray if available. If this message appears and the tray is loaded with the correct paper type, check the print driver settings to make sure that they match the tray type settings. Clean the paper sensor.
-
Page 378: Wx.yz Error To Use Another Tray, Touch «Options
Z = 9: Rough paper ◦ Z = A: Extra heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 3) ◦ Z = B: Heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 2) ◦ Z = C: Heavy paper 3 ◦ Z = D: Heavy paper 2 ◦…
-
Page 379: 347
5: Heavy paper 2, typed or Auto sense ◦ 6: Heavy paper 3, typed or Auto sense ◦ 7: Glossy paper 1, typed or Auto sense ◦ 8: Glossy paper 2, typed or Auto sense ◦ 9: Glossy paper 3, typed or Auto sense ◦…
-
Page 380: 348
Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Re-send the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.01.XX Description Image transformer internal error. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Re-send the print job. item in the Preboot menu.
-
Page 381: 349
47.05.00 Description Print spooler framework internal error. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Re-send the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.06.XX Description Print app internal error. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again.
-
Page 382: Wx.yz Fuser Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
50.WX.YZ Fuser error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced a fuser error. W = fuser error code ◦ X = fuser mode ◦ 0: Photo paper 1, 2, 3, Designated paper 2, 3, or NA, typed or Auto-sense ●…
-
Page 383
6: Deep sleep ● F: Off ● Recommended action W = A: High fuser temperature 2 Remove and then reseat the fuser. Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser. Make sure the product is not located in front of a vent or window where cool air may interfere with the ability of the fuser to heat up. -
Page 384
W = 3, High fuser temperature 1 Remove and then reseat the fuser. Check the paper type setting using the product menus and in the product driver. Make sure that they match and are correct for the type of paper being used. If this product was previously serviced, check the connector (J61) on the DC controller PCA. -
Page 385: Yy Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
W = 9, High fuser temperature 2 Remove and then reseat the fuser. Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser. Make sure the product is not located in front of a vent or window where cool air may interfere with the ability of the fuser to heat up.
-
Page 386: Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
52.00.00 Error To continue turn off then on Description A scanner rotation error has occurred. Recommended action Turn the product off and then on. Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu. If the component tests showed a failure, reconnect the connectors of the scanner motor (J1900 and J801) and the DC controller PCA (J71).
-
Page 387: Xx.yy Error
XX = 05 Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu. Check the connectors (J1900 and J801) on the laser scanner driver PCA and the connector (J71) on the DC controller PCA. If the error persists, replace the laser scanner. 54.XX.YY Error Description A sensor error has occurred.
-
Page 388: Yy Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
56.00.YY Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced a communication error with the optional paper tray. 56.00.01 (event code): Illegal input, selected paper input tray is unavailable ◦ 56.00.02 (event code): Illegal output, selected paper output bin is unavailable ◦…
-
Page 389: Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
Recommended action Turn the product off and then on. Verify that the connector (J63) on the DC controller PCA and the sensor (J400) are connected correctly and undamaged. If the error persists, replace environmental sensor. 58.00.04 Error To continue turn off then on Description The low-voltage power supply is defective.
-
Page 390: Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
Reconnect the connector (J47) on the DC controller PCA. Replace the fuser motor. 59.00.40 Error To continue turn off then on Description A fuser motor rotational error has occurred. Recommended action Turn the product off and then on. Perform the fuser motor component test in the Troubleshooting menu.
-
Page 391: Tray Lifting Error
60.00.0Y Tray <Y> lifting error Description The indicated tray has not lifted into the paper feed position. Recommended action 60.00.02 Media input Tray 2 lift-up motor (M4) failure Use the Tray 2 paper surface sensor (SR10) test in the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is properly functioning.
-
Page 392: Media Input Source Pickup Mechanism Malfunction
TIP: Check the connector (J2006) on the paper feeder controller PCA associated with the tray. If the error persists, replace the cassette tray. 60.00.05 or 60.00.06 Media input Tray 5 lift-up motor (M82) failure or media input Tray 6 lift-up motor (M92) failure NOTE: The Tray 5 and Tray 6 motors, sensors, and connectors numbers depend on the input device configuration.
-
Page 393: No System To Continue Turn Off Then On
Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Use the paper pick-up motor (M1, M4, M5, M92, M3301, M3304) test in the Component test verify that the pickup motor is properly functioning. If the pickup motor is not functioning, replace the paper pick-up assembly.
-
Page 394: Output Accessory Failure To Continue Turn Off Then On
Turn the power on. If the error persists, replace the stapler assembly. 66.80.19 Output accessory failure To continue turn off then on Description Self-priming malfunction. Not able to complete self-priming after 11 attempts. Recommended action Turn the power off. Make sure that the external paper handling accessory is clear of all packing materials and other obstructions.
-
Page 395: X.yy Embedded Jetdirect Error
Recommended action Turn the product off and then on. If the error persists, replace the DC controller. 80.0X.YY Embedded Jetdirect Error Description Embedded HP JetDirect print server critical error. 80.01.80 (event code) ◦ No heartbeat 80.01.81 (event code) ◦ Reclaim time-out 80.01.82 (event code)
-
Page 396: Wx.00 Wireless Network Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
80.03.08 (event code) ◦ Invalid identify response 80.03.09 (event code) ◦ Invalid channel map return status 80.03.10 (event code) ◦ Invalid reclaim return status 80.03.12 (event code) ◦ Datagram invalid buffer 80.03.13 (event code) ◦ Max stream channels 80.03.14 (event code) ◦…
-
Page 397: Wx.yz Embedded Jetdirect Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
If the error persists, replace the wireless network component. 81.WX.YZ Embedded JetDirect Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced an embedded HP Jetdirect print server critical error. 81.01.00 (event code): EIO Networking Event <UVWXYZ> ◦ 81.02.00 (event code): Wireless Networking Event <UVWXYZ>…
-
Page 398: Corrupt Data In X Volume
98.00.0X Corrupt data in X volume Description Data corruption has occurred in the firmware volume. 98.00.01 Corrupt data in firmware volume Reinstall firmware ◦ 98.00.02 Corrupt data in solutions volume Re-install accessory solutions ◦ 98.00.03 Corrupt data in configuration volume Re-configure the product ◦…
-
Page 399: Upgrade Not Performed Error Writing To Disk
99.00.03 Upgrade not performed error writing to disk Description Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not performed. An error occurred when writing to the hard disk. Recommended action Download the firmware again, and then attempt the upgrade again. If the error persists, perform the clean disk/format disk process. Download the firmware from the Preboot menu, and then attempt the upgrade again.
-
Page 400: Upgrade Not Performed Error Reading Upgrade
99.00.07 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Unexpected read error when reading rest of header. Recommended action Download the RFU file and attempt the upgrade again. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 99.00.08 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed.
-
Page 401: Upgrade Not Performed The File Is Invalid
Job canceled when reading rest of header. Recommended action Re-send the RFU. 99.00.12 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Header number is 1 but header size doesn’t match version 1 size. Recommended action Download the RFU file again.
-
Page 402: 370
Download the correct firmware file from www.hp.com/go/ljMFPM725_firmware, and then re-send the firmware upgrade. 99.00.27 only: Turn the product off, and then on again. Re-send the firmware upgrade. If the error persists, try the sending the upgrade by another method (USB or HP Embedded Web Server). 99.01.XX Description 99.01.00…
-
Page 403: Unsupported Disk
Recommended action No action necessary. 99.02.09 Description Firmware upgrade cancelled by user. Recommended action No action necessary. 99.09.60 Unsupported disk Description Preboot menu error. The hard disk currently installed is not recognized or supported by the product. Recommended action Install the correct hard disk for this product. 99.09.61 Unsupported disk Description Preboot menu error.
-
Page 404: Incorrect Disk
99.09.63 Incorrect disk Description A new or blank disk has been installed in a device which previously had an encrypted disk. Recommended action Follow the procedure to load firmware on a new hard disk, and then lock it to this product. 99.09.64 Disk malfunction Description A fatal hard disk failure has occurred.
-
Page 405: Xx.yy
Select the Administration menu. NOTE: If there is a password assigned to the Administrator, a prompt to enter the password displays. Select the Download item. The user can now download a new firmware bundle to the product. 99.09.68 Description The secondary encrypted disk has been removed from this device. Recommended action Reinstall the secondary encrypted storage device.
-
Page 406: Black Cartridge Low
Actual supply life remaining may vary. Consider having a replacement available. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. Once an HP supply has reached the very low condition, HP’s warranty on that supply has ended.
-
Page 407: Card Slot File Operation Failed To Clear Touch «Clear
Card slot not initialized To clear touch “Clear” Description This file-storage component must be initialized before use. Recommended action Use the embedded Web server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the component. Cartridge ship mode Description Manufacturing use only — should not be seen in field.
-
Page 408: Cleaning Disk % Complete Do Not Power Off
Recommended action Print the job by using a product driver for a different print language, or add the requested language to the product (if possible). To see a list of available personalities, print a configuration page. Cleaning disk <X>% complete Do not power off Description A storage device is being sanitized or cleaned.
-
Page 409: Data Received
Recommended action Close the cartridge door. Make sure that the connectors are fully seated on the cartridge door switch SW3. Make sure that the tab on the cartridge door that activates the switch is not missing or damaged. Replace the cartridge-door assembly if necessary. Replace the door switch.
-
Page 410: Eio Disk Spinning Up
Recommended action Turn the product off. Remove the EIO disk from the slot indicated. Install a new EIO disk. Turn the product on. EIO <X> disk spinning up Description The EIO disk product in the indicated slot is spinning up. Jobs that require disk access must wait. X = 1: Slot 1 ◦…
-
Page 411: Eio Is Write Protected To Clear Touch «Clear
EIO not initialized To clear touch “Clear” Description This file-storage component must be initialized before use. Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system. Event log is empty Description No product events are in the log.
-
Page 412: Fuser Kit Very Low To Continue, Touch «Ok
Fuser Kit very low To continue, touch “OK” Description The product indicates when a supply level is very low. NOTE: After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP Premium Protection Warranty for that supply has ended. Recommended action Replace the fuser kit.
-
Page 413: Install Black Cartridge
Recommended action No action is necessary. Wait until the Ready message appears on the display. Install Black Cartridge Description A supply is either not installed or not correctly installed in the product. Recommended action Replace or reinstall the toner cartridge correctly to continue printing. Install Fuser Unit Description The fuser is either not installed or not correctly installed in the product.
-
Page 414: Internal Disk File Operation Failed To Clear Touch «Clear
Internal disk file operation failed To clear touch “Clear” Description A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation. Recommended action Press the Clear button to clear the message. Internal disk file system is full To clear touch “Clear” Description A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full.
-
Page 415: Internal Disk Spinning Up
Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system. Internal disk spinning up Description Internal disk device is spinning up its platter. Jobs that require disk access must wait. Recommended action No action is necessary.
-
Page 416: Load Tray : [Size] To Continue, Touch «Ok
Make sure that the sensor flag on the paper presence sensor is not damaged and moves freely. Reconnect the corresponding connector: Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): Connectors (J1) on the Tray 1 paper out sensor and the connector ● (J41) on the DC controller PCA. Input trays: Connectors (J15 and J7) on the tray paper out sensor and the connectors (J43, ●…
-
Page 417: Load Tray : [Type], [Size] To Use Another Tray, Touch «Options
Recommended action Load the tray with the requested paper or adjust the paper guides. If the error persists, use the tray paper present sensor test in the Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test to verify that the sensor is correctly functioning. Make sure that the sensor flag on the paper presence sensor is not damaged and moves freely. Reconnect the corresponding connector: Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): Connector (J1) on the Tray 1 paper out sensor and the connector ●…
-
Page 418: Manually Feed: [Size]
Recommended action The even-numbered pages of the two-sided document have printed. Follow the next steps to print the odd-numbered pages. Maintaining the same orientation, remove the document from the output bin. Do not discard blank pages. Flip the document over so the printed side is up. Load document in Tray 1.
-
Page 419: Manually Feed: [Type], [Size] To Continue, Touch «Ok
Manually feed: [Type], [Size] To continue, touch “OK” Description This message appears when manual feed is selected, Tray 1 is not loaded, and other trays are available. Recommended action Load tray with requested paper. ◦ If paper is already in tray, press the Help button to exit the message and then press the button…
-
Page 420: Output Bin Full
Description This is a test mode used in manufacturing and should not be seen on a normally operating product. Recommended action Contact HP support for steps to resolve this condition. Printing Engine Test… Description The product is printing an engine test page.
-
Page 421: Ram Disk Device Failure To Clear Touch «Clear
Description The RAM disk file system must be initialized before it can be used. Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system. Remove cartridge lock Description The product has been turned on with a cartridge shipping lock installed on the toner cartridge.
-
Page 422: Remove The Toner Cartridge
The fuser kit does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: After the fuser kit reaches its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection Warranty on that fuser kit ends. Recommended action Replace the fuser kit.
-
Page 423: Replace Supplies
The actual life remaining might be different than estimated. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable.
-
Page 424: Rom Disk Is Write Protected To Clear Touch «Clear
Description The ROM disk file system must be initialized before it can be used. Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system. Size mismatch in Tray <X> Description The paper in the listed tray does not match the size specified for that tray.
-
Page 425: Supplies Low
Multiple supplies on the product have reached the low threshold. Recommended action Replace the supply when print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection Warranty ends. Supplies very low To continue, touch “OK” Description More than one color supply on the product has reached the very low condition.
-
Page 426: Tray Empty: [Type], [Size]
NOTE: This could be a false message. If the tray is loaded without removing the shipping lock, the product does not sense that the paper is loaded. Remove the shipping lock, and then load the tray. Tray <X> empty: [Type], [Size] Description The specified tray is empty and needs to be loaded, but the current job does not need this tray to print.
-
Page 427: Type Mismatch Tray
NOTE: If this message appears after lifter drive assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that the connector on the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated. Type mismatch Tray <X> Description The specified tray contains a paper type that does not match the configured type. Recommended action The specified tray will not be used until this condition is addressed.
-
Page 428: Unsupported Drive Installed
Unsupported supply installed To continue, touch “OK” Description One or more genuine HP supplies designed for a different product are installed. These supplies are not supported by the product. The product may either shut down or slow down. Recommended action The installed supply was not designed for this product and is not supported.
-
Page 429: Unsupported Usb Accessory Detected Remove Usb Accessory
Recommended action Turn product off and remove the excess tray accessories. Turn the product on. Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB accessory Description A non-supported USB accessory has been installed. Recommended action Turn the product off, remove the USB accessory, and then turn the product on. Upgrade complete To continue turn off then on Description The firmware upgrade is complete.
-
Page 430: Usb Is Write Protected To Clear Touch «Clear
Description The USB device file system must be initialized before it can be used. Recommended action Use the embedded Web server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the component. USB storage accessory removed Clearing any associated data Description This message displays for six seconds after removal of the USB storage accessory.
-
Page 431: Usb Storage File System Is Full To Clear Touch «Clear
Used supply installed To continue, touch “OK” Description The product displays this message when a used supply (a remanufactured or refilled genuine HP or non-HP product) has been installed. 10.00.34 (event code): Black toner cartridge ◦…
-
Page 432: Event Log Messages
Event log messages Some messages appear only in the event log. For additional numeric messages, see the control-panel message section of this manual. Figure 2-76 Sample event log Event Log Page 1 Product information Event number Date and time Engine cycles Event log code Firmware version number Description of personality…
-
Page 433: Print Or View An Event Log
Print or view an event log NOTE: The event log in using the Administration menu shows only a subset of events. For a complete event log, use the Service menu. Print or view the event log from the Administration menu From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
-
Page 434
Event log message Description Action 99.00.01 Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not The firmware file is corrupt. Download the performed. The file is corrupt. firmware file and attempt the upgrade again. 99.00.02 Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not The IO timed out during the firmware performed. -
Page 435
Event log message Description Action 99.00.13 Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not The firmware file sent was not the correct file. performed. An invalid file was sent. Download the firmware file again, making 99.00.14 sure to download the file for the correct product model. -
Page 436: Clear Jams
Clear jams Jam locations Use this illustration to troubleshoot jams in the product. Document feeder Stapler/stacker Output path Duplex path (for two-sided printing) Stapler/stacker output bin Output bin Toner cartridge Input trays Optional input trays Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 437: Figure 2-77 Product Base Paper Path And Sensor Locations (1 Of 2)
Figure 2-77 Product base paper path and sensor locations (1 of 2) SR12 Figure 2-78 Product base paper path and sensor locations (2 of 2) Simplex paper path Duplex paper path Duplex re-pickup sensor Duplex reverse sensor Figure 2-79 1×500 paper feeder paper path and sensor locations PF cassette media feed sensor Clear jams ENWW…
-
Page 438: Figure 2-80 1X500 And 3X500 Paper Deck Paper Path And Sensor Locations
Figure 2-80 1×500 and 3×500 paper deck paper path and sensor locations PD cassette 1 media feed sensor SR1 (1×500 and 3×500) PD cassette 2 media feed sensor SR81 (3×500 only) PD cassette 3 media feed sensor SR91 (3×500 only) Figure 2-81 High capacity input (HCI) paper path and sensor locations HCI left cassette…
-
Page 439: Auto-Navigation For Clearing Jams
Figure 2-82 Stapler/stacker paper path and sensor locations SR2103 Output sensor SR2100 Inlet sensor Auto-navigation for clearing jams The auto-navigation feature assists you in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control panel. When you complete a step, the product displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all steps in the procedure.
-
Page 440
Open the document-feeder cover. Lift the jam-access door, and remove any jammed paper. If necessary, rotate the green wheel at the front of the document feeder to remove jammed paper. Close the document-feeder cover. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW… -
Page 441: Clear Jams In The Output-Bin Area
Clear jams in the output-bin area If paper is visible from the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it. Clear jams in the stapler/stacker If paper is visible in the stapler/stacker output bin, grasp the leading edge of the paper and slowly pull the paper out of the product.
-
Page 442
Open the upper-left door. Press the green tab down to open the bar. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW… -
Page 443: Clear Staple Jams
Grasp both sides of the paper, and slowly pull the paper out of the product. Close the upper-left door door. Make sure that both sides of the door snap into place. Clear staple jams To reduce the risk of staple jams, make sure that you staple 30 or fewer pages of paper (80 g/m (20 lb) at a time.
-
Page 444
Open the stapler door. Remove the staple cartridge. Remove any loose staples from the product. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW… -
Page 445
Lift up the lever on the front of the staple cartridge. Remove the sheet of staples from the stapler. Push down the lever on the front of the staple cartridge. Clear jams ENWW… -
Page 446: Clear Jams In Tray 1
Insert the staple cartridge. Close the stapler door. Clear jams in Tray 1 Slowly pull the jammed paper out of the product. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 447: Clear Jams In Tray 2 Or Tray 3
Clear jams in Tray 2 or Tray 3 Open the right-side access door. If the jammed page is visible, gently pull it out of the product. If you were not able to clear the jam by using the right-side access door, slide the tray out of the product.
-
Page 448
If the edge of the paper is visible in the feed area, slowly pull the paper toward the left side and then out of the product. NOTE: Do not force the paper if it will not move easily. If the paper is stuck in a tray, try removing it through the tray above (if applicable) or through the toner-cartridge area. -
Page 449: Clear Jams In The 500-Sheet Trays
Clear jams in the 500-sheet trays Open the right-side access door and the 500- sheet tray jam-access door. Remove the 500-sheet tray. If the edge of the paper is visible in the feed area, slowly pull the paper toward the right side and out of the product.
-
Page 450: Clear Jams In The 3,500-Sheet High-Capacity Tray
Close the 500-sheet tray. Close the right-side access door and the 500- sheet tray jam-access door. Clear jams in the 3,500-sheet high-capacity tray Open the right and left sides of the tray. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 451
Remove any damaged sheets of paper. Above the right-side tray, press the green button to release the jam-access plate. If jammed paper is in the feed area, pull it down to remove it. Clear jams ENWW… -
Page 452
Push up on the jam-access plate to close it. Close the right and left sides of the tray. Open the jam-access door on the right side of the high-capacity tray cabinet. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW… -
Page 453: Clear Jams From The Toner-Cartridge Area
Lift up the jam-release plate and remove any jammed paper. Close the jam-access door on the right side of the high-capacity tray cabinet. Clear jams from the toner-cartridge area Press the cartridge-door-release button. Clear jams ENWW…
-
Page 454
Open the cartridge door. Remove the toner cartridge. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Pull the green tab down to open the metal plate inside the product. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW… -
Page 455
Slowly pull the paper out of the product. Be careful to not tear the paper. CAUTION: Avoid spilling loose toner. Use a dry, lint-free cloth to clean any toner that might have fallen into the product. If loose toner falls into the product, it might cause temporary problems with print quality. -
Page 456: Clear Jams In The Fuser
Clear jams in the fuser Open the fuser door on the left side of the product. CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Push down on the green tab to open the fuser jam-access cover. Remove any paper from the fuser.
-
Page 457
Close the fuser jam-access cover. Close the fuser door. Clear jams ENWW… -
Page 458: Clear Jams From The Duplexer
Clear jams from the duplexer Remove the duplexer. Remove any paper from the duplexer. Reinstall the duplexer. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 459: Solve Paper-Handling Problems
Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not fan the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package.
-
Page 460: The Document Feeder Jams, Skews, Or Picks Up Multiple Sheets Of Paper
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper The original might have something on it, such as staples or self-adhesive notes, that must be ● removed. Check that all rollers are in place and that the roller-access cover inside the document feeder is ●…
-
Page 461: Use Manual Print Modes
Use manual print modes Try the following manual print modes to see if they solve the image-quality problems. Select a manual print mode From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. Open the following menus: General Settings ●…
-
Page 462: Table 2-33 Mp Modes Under The Optimize Submenu
Humidity Mode With glossy film, set to High when the product is in a high- humidity environment and print-quality defects occur on HP Tough Paper or Opaque film. With transparencies, set to High when the product is in a high-humidity environment and print-quality defects occur on color transparencies on the first page of a print job.
-
Page 463: Print Quality Troubleshooting Tools
Print quality troubleshooting tools Repetitive defects measurements Use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image-quality problems. Place the ruler next to the first occurrence of the defect on the page. Find the distance between identical defects and use the figure below to identify the component that is causing the defect.
-
Page 464: Solve Image-Quality Problems
Make sure that the toner cartridge is fully installed. The toner cartridge might be almost empty. Check the supplies status, and replace the toner cartridge if necessary. The paper might not meet HP specifications (for example, the paper is too moist or too rough). Light print (entire page) Make sure that the toner cartridge is fully installed.
-
Page 465
Table 2-34 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Image example Solution Stop a print job during the print operation before it is complete, then remove the toner cartridge. Open the photosensitive drum shield, and look at the toner image on the drum. If the image is not fully transferring to the page, replace the transfer ◦… -
Page 466
Table 2-34 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Image example Solution Dropouts Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. Try using a smoother paper. If the transfer roller is deformed or damaged, replace the roller. The high-voltage contact of the static eliminator with the toner cartridge might be dirty. -
Page 467
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide. The pressure roller is dirty, the fuser film is scratched, or a foreign substance is on the fuser film. -
Page 468
Repeat image This type of defect might occur when using preprinted forms or a large quantity of narrow paper. Verify that the preprinted ink used on forms meets HP specifications Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk, The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf j us a weue jd, fnk ksneh vnk kjdfkaakd ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn. -
Page 469
Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. -
Page 470
Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. The toner cartridge might need to be replaced. -
Page 471
Blurred print Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. -
Page 472: Clean The Product
Clean the product Over time, particles of toner and paper accumulate inside the product. This can cause print-quality problems during printing. Cleaning the product eliminates or reduces these problems. Clean the paper path and print-cartridge areas every time that you change the toner cartridge or whenever print-quality problems occur.
-
Page 473
Press the power button to turn off the product, and then disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet. Open the scanner lid. Align paper that has copy defects with the scanner glass to identify the locations of dirt or smudges. Clean the product ENWW… -
Page 474: Clean The Pickup Rollers And Separation Pad In The Document Feeder
Clean the main scanner glass, the document- feeder glass (the small strip of glass on the left side of the scanner), and the white foam backing. Use a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner. Dry the glass and white plastic backing by using a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
-
Page 475
Lift the document-feeder latch. Open the document-feeder cover. Clean the product ENWW… -
Page 476
Remove any visible lint or dust from each of the feed rollers and the separation pad using compressed air or a clean lint-free cloth moistened with warm water. NOTE: Lift up the roller assembly so you can clean the second roller. Close the document-feeder cover. -
Page 477: Solve Performance Problems
Large batches, narrow paper, and Print in smaller batches, on a different special paper such as gloss, type of paper, or on a different size of transparency, cardstock, and HP Tough paper. Paper can slow the print job. Pages did not print.
-
Page 478: Solve Connectivity Problems
The product IP address is listed on the product configuration page. If you installed the product using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always print to this printer, even if its IP address changes.
-
Page 479: The Computer Is Unable To Communicate With The Product
If you installed the product using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the hostname instead of the IP address. If the IP address is correct, delete the product and then add it again. The computer is unable to communicate with the product Test network communication by pinging the product.
-
Page 480: Service Mode Functions
Service mode functions Service menu Service menu is PIN-protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access to Service menu. When you select Service from the list of menus, the product prompts you to type an eight-digit personal identification number (PIN). NOTE: The product automatically exits the Service…
-
Page 481
First level Second level Value Description ADF Simplex Count Set the total single-sided pages fed through the document feeder. ADF Duplex Count Set the total two-sided pages fed through the document feeder. Copy Scan Count Set the total copy pages that have been scanned. -
Page 482
First level Second level Value Description Hook Operations Off Hook On Hook Generate Random Data Select a value from the list. Generate DTMF Tone Burst Select a value from the list. Generate DTMF Continuous Tone Select a value from the list. Generate Pulse Burst Select a value from… -
Page 483: Convert Service Id To Actual Date
Product resets Restore factory-set defaults From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. Open the following menus: General Settings ● Restore Factory Settings ● Touch the Reset button. Restore the service ID Restore the service ID If you replace the formatter, the date is lost.
-
Page 484: Cold Reset Using Preboot Menu
Product cold reset Cold reset using the Preboot menu Turn the product on. Touch the HP logo that displays in the center of the touchscreen until the Preboot menu opens. Use the down arrow button to highlight Administrator, and then touch the button.
-
Page 485: Partial Clean
The product default settings are not properly working. ● Execute a 3 Partial Clean Turn the product on. Touch the HP logo that displays in the center of the touchscreen until the Preboot menu opens. Touch the down arrow button to highlight Administrator, and then touch the button.
-
Page 486: Format Disk
To reset the product by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings. ● Execute a 2 Format Disk Turn the product on. Touch the HP logo that displays in the center of the touchscreen until the Preboot menu opens. Use the down arrow button to highlight Administrator, and then touch the button.
-
Page 487: Solve Fax Problems
Solve fax problems Checklist for solving fax problems Use the following checklist to help identify the cause of any fax-related problems you encounter: Are you using the fax cable supplied with the fax accessory? This fax accessory has ● been tested with the supplied fax cable to meet RJ11 and functional specifications. Do not substitute another fax cable;…
-
Page 488: Are You Using A Phone Company Voice-Messaging Service Or An Answering Machine
Are you using a phone company voice-messaging service or an answering machine? If the rings-to-answer setting for the messaging service is lower than the rings-to-answer setting for the fax accessory, the messaging service answers the call, and the fax accessory cannot receive faxes. If the rings-to-answer setting for the fax accessory is lower than that of the messaging service, the fax accessory answers all calls.
-
Page 489: Check Fax Accessory Status
The fax accessory is installed and operational; however, the HP Digital Sending utility has either disabled the product fax feature or has enabled LAN fax. When LAN fax is enabled, the analog-fax feature is disabled. Only one fax feature, either LAN fax or analog fax, can be enabled at a time.
-
Page 490: General Fax Problems
Software Configuration utility to enable the fax address book feature. Not able to locate the Fax settings in Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin are Select Digital Sending and Fax from HP Web Jetadmin. located under the device’s status page the drop-down menu.
-
Page 491: Use Fax Over Voip Networks
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). Fax is very dependent upon timing and signal quality, so a fax transmission is more sensitive to a VoIP environment. The following are suggested changes in settings for the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500 when it is connected to a VoIP service: Begin with the fax speed set in Fast (V.34) mode and with Error Correction Mode (ECM) turned…
-
Page 492: Problems With Receiving Faxes
Problems with receiving faxes Problem Cause Solution Incoming fax calls are not being The rings-to-answer setting might not be Check the rings-to-answer setting. answered by the fax accessory (no fax set correctly. detected). The fax cable might not be connected Check the installation.
-
Page 493
Problem Cause Solution The product is either low on toner or has If configured, the product stops printing run out of toner. as soon as it is low on toner or runs out of toner. Any faxes received are stored in memory and print after the toner has been replaced. -
Page 494: Problems With Sending Faxes
Problems with sending faxes Problem Cause Solution Faxes are transmitting very slowly. You might be sending a complex fax, Complex faxes take longer to transmit. such as one with many graphics. The receiving fax machine might have a The fax accessory only sends the fax at slow modem speed.
-
Page 495
Problem Cause Solution Outgoing fax calls keep dialing. The fax accessory automatically redials This is normal operation. If you do not a fax number if the Redial on Busy want the fax to retry, set the Redial on option is on or if the Redial on No Busy option to 0, set the… -
Page 496: Fax Error Codes
T.30 Protocol Trace. Print one of these reports to obtain the error code. A detailed description of the error codes and the appropriate action is available at www.hp.com. Search for HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500.
-
Page 497: Send-Fax Messages
Send-fax messages Table 2-36 Send-fax messages Message Error No. Description Action Cancelled Someone cancelled the fax at the None. product control panel. Success The fax was sent successfully. None. Fail Busy The receiving fax machine is The fax will be retired busy.
-
Page 498: Receive-Fax Messages
Receive-fax messages Table 2-37 Receive-fax messages Message Error No. Description Action Success The fax transmission was None. successful. Blocked The receiving fax machine is None. using the blocked-number feature and is blocking this fax. Failed The fax might be corrupted or Ask the sender to resend the fax;…
-
Page 499: Service Settings
Service settings These items in the control-panel menus are intended to be used when an HP service representative is assisting you. Settings in the Troubleshooting menu From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
-
Page 500: Product Upgrades
Product upgrades To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the product, go to www.hp.com/go/ ljMFPM725_firmware. Determine the installed revision of firmware Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware. On the configuration page, look in the section marked Device Information for the firmware datecode and firmware revision.
-
Page 501: Usb Storage Device (Preboot Menu)
Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the product control panel. Turn the product on. Touch the HP logo that displays in the center of the touchscreen until the Preboot menu opens. Wait for the Pre-Boot menu to appear on the control-panel display, and then touch the down arrow button to scroll to Administrator.
-
Page 502: Usb Storage Device (Control-Panel Menu)
USB storage device (control-panel menu) Copy the xxxxxxx.bdl file to a portable USB flash drive. Turn the product on, and then wait until it reaches the Ready state. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button.
-
Page 503: Appendix A Service And Support
Service and support Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ● HP’s Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement ● HP policy on non-HP supplies ● HP anticounterfeit Web site ● Data stored on the toner cartridge ● End User License Agreement ●…
-
Page 504: Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
-
Page 505
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ENWW… -
Page 506: Hp’s Premium Protection Warranty: Laserjet Toner Cartridge Limited Warranty Statement
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.
-
Page 507: Hp Policy On Non-Hp Supplies
For HP printer products, the use of a non-HP toner cartridge or a refilled toner cartridge does not affect either the warranty to the customer or any HP support contract with the customer. However, if product failure or damage is attributable to the use of a non-HP toner cartridge or refilled toner cartridge, HP will charge its standard time and materials charges to service the product for the particular failure or damage.
-
Page 508: Hp Anticounterfeit Web Site
HP toner cartridge and the control-panel message says the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem. Your toner cartridge might not be a genuine HP toner cartridge if you notice the following: The supplies status page indicates that a non-HP supply is installed.
-
Page 509: Data Stored On The Toner Cartridge
Data stored on the toner cartridge The HP toner cartridges used with this product contain a memory chip that assists in the operation of the product. In addition, this memory chip collects a limited set of information about the usage of the product, which…
-
Page 510: End User License Agreement
(b) Hewlett-Packard Company (“HP”) that governs your use of the software product (“Software”). This EULA does not apply if there is a separate license agreement between you and HP or its suppliers for the Software, including a license agreement in online documentation. The term “Software” may include (i) associated media, (ii) a user guide and other printed materials, and (iii) “online”…
-
Page 511
CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. HP and its affiliates may collect and use technical information you provide in relation to (i) your Use of the Software or the HP Product, or (ii) the provision of support services related to the Software or the HP Product. All such information will be subject to HP’s privacy policy. -
Page 512
© 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Rev. 04/09 Appendix A Service and support ENWW… -
Page 513: Openssl
OpenSSL This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/) THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT «AS IS» AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
-
Page 514: Customer Self-Repair Warranty Service
If during the diagnosis period, HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory.
-
Page 515: Customer Support
Customer support Get telephone support for your country/region Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/. Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and problem description ready. Get 24-hour Internet support www.hp.com/support/ljMFPM725…
-
Page 516
Appendix A Service and support ENWW… -
Page 517: Appendix B Product Specifications
Product specifications Physical specifications ● Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ● Environmental specifications ● ENWW…
-
Page 518: Physical Specifications
1171 mm (46.1 in) 1112 mm (43.8 in) Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions www.hp.com/go/ljMFPM725_regulatory-environmental for current information. CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. This will damage the product and void the product warranty.
-
Page 519: Appendix C Regulatory Information
Regulatory information FCC regulations ● Environmental product stewardship program ● Declaration of conformity ● Declaration of conformity (fax models) ● Certificate of Volatility ● Safety statements ● Additional statements for telecom (fax) products ● ENWW…
-
Page 520: Fcc Regulations
NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
-
Page 521: Environmental Product Stewardship Program
Toner consumption EconoMode uses less toner, which might extend the life of the toner cartridge. HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, the toner supply might outlast the mechanical parts in the toner cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and is no longer acceptable, consider replacing the toner cartridge.
-
Page 522: Hp Laserjet Print Supplies
Return and recycling instructions United States and Puerto Rico The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more HP LaserJet toner cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below.
-
Page 523: Non-U.s. Returns
Paper This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002. Material restrictions This HP product does not contain added mercury.
-
Page 524: Disposal Of Waste Equipment By Users
For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle, or contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment.
-
Page 525
HP’s environmental management system ● HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program ● Material Safety Data Sheets ● Visit www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment. Environmental product stewardship program ENWW… -
Page 526: Declaration Of Conformity
Hewlett-Packard Company DoC#: BOISB-1105-01-Rel.1.0 Manufacturer’s Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product Product Name: HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M725dn BOISB-1105-01 Regulatory Model Numbers: Product Options: Toner Cartridges: CF214A, CF214X conforms to the following Product Specifications:…
-
Page 527
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ- TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D–71034 Böblingen, Germany (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143) www.hp.com/go/certificates USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho… -
Page 528: Declaration Of Conformity (Fax Models)
DoC#: BOISB-1105-02-Rel.1.0 Manufacturer’s Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product Product Name: HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M725f, HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M725z, HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M725z+ Regulatory Model: BOISB-1105-02 BOISB-0703-00 – Fax Module Product Options:…
-
Page 529
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ- TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143) www.hp.com/go/certificates USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho… -
Page 530: Certificate Of Volatility
There are no steps to clear this factory product configuration data. data required for the device to function. User modifications are limited to downloading digitally signed HP firmware images. Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:…
-
Page 531: Figure C-2 Certificate Of Volatility (2 Of 2)
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)? No If Yes please describe below Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. Restore encrypted backed-up system settings. USB ports can be disabled.
-
Page 532: Safety Statements
Safety statements Laser safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.
-
Page 533: Emc Statement (China)
överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. HUOLTO HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M725dn, M725f, M725z, M725z+ — kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta…
-
Page 534
tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja. VARO ! Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING ! Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. -
Page 535: Gs Statement (Germany)
GS statement (Germany) Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert warden. Das Gerät ist kein Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß BildscharbV. Bei ungünstigen Lichtverhältnissen (z. B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen auf dem Display und damit zu Einschränkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen.
-
Page 536: Additional Statements For Telecom (Fax) Products
Additional statements for telecom (fax) products EU Statement for Telecom Operation This product is intended to be connected to the analog Public Switched Telecommunication Networks (PSTN) of European Economic Area (EEA) countries/regions. It meets requirements of EU R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries appropriate CE conformity marking.
-
Page 537: Telephone Consumer Protection Act (Us)
number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area. This equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C. An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack, which is Part 68 compliant.
-
Page 538: Vietnam Telecom Wired/Wireless Marking For Ictqc Type Approved Products
cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution can be particularly important in rural areas. CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
-
Page 539: Index
Calibrate/Cleaning menu 294 Copy Settings menu 231 clearing paper jams 417 error messages 391 jams, clearing 421 Display Settings menu 268 non-HP 475 Fax Settings menu 250 Accessories recycling 490 General Settings menu 223 3,500-sheet high-capacity input replace message 391…
-
Page 540
PCA sensors 54 event log messages 400 document feeder count home button is unresponsive 131 document feeder pages 448 HP Customer Care 483 document feeder interval 448 feeding problems 458 HP fraud Web site 476 Index ENWW… -
Page 541
HP Jetdirect print server laser-beam exposure stage, image Backup/Restore 293 configuration page 219 formation operations 26 Calibrate/Cleaning 294 lights 133 latent-image formation 25 Copy Settings 231 Display Settings 268 leading edge detection 50 LEDs. See lights Fax Settings 250 image defects, problem-solving… -
Page 542
437 recycling 490 loose toner 435 paper jams electronic hardware 492 manual print modes 429 3,500-sheet high-capacity HP printing supplies returns and misformed characters 436 tray 418 environmental program 490 repeating defects 436 detection operations 50 repeating defects, problem-… -
Page 543
476 sensor tests manual diagnostic tests 139 error messages 391 tray 4 paper size sensors (SW2 document feeder 54 non-HP 475 jam detection operations 50 recycling 490 and SW3) 168 sensor tests manual tray/bin pickup-and-feed system replace message 391… -
Page 544
Web sites jams, clearing 421 list 401 customer support 483 memory chips 477 flowchart 122 fraud reports 476 non-HP 475 Material Safety Data Sheet recycling 490 jams 404 (MSDS) 492 replace message 391 lights, using 133 warranty 474… -
Page 546
© 2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. www.hp.com *CF066-91023* *CF066-91023* CF066-91023…
-
Contents
-
Table of Contents
-
Troubleshooting
-
Bookmarks
Related Manuals for HP LASERJET ENTERPRISE M725dn
Summary of Contents for HP LASERJET ENTERPRISE M725dn
-
Page 1
LASERJET ENTERPRISE MFP M725 Troubleshooting Manual M725dn M725f M725z M725z+… -
Page 3
HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M725 Troubleshooting Manual… -
Page 4
Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Part number: CF066-91023… -
Page 5
Conventions used in this guide TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts. NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task. CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product. -
Page 6
Conventions used in this guide ENWW… -
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Table of contents 1 Theory of operation ………………….1 Basic operation ……………………2 Function structure …………………. 2 Operation sequence ………………..2 Engine control system ………………….. 4 DC controller PCA ………………… 5 Motor control ………………… 7 Motor locations …………….7 Failure detection …………….. 8 Fan control ………………..
-
Page 8
Development block ………………. 26 Step 3: Developing …………..26 Transfer block ………………27 Step 4: Image transfer …………… 27 Step 5: Separation from the drum ……….27 Fuser block ………………..29 Step 6: Fusing …………….29 Drum-cleaning block …………….. 29 Step 7: Drum cleaning …………… -
Page 9
Fuser wrap jam 1 ………………53 Door open jam 1 ………………53 Multiple-feed jam 1 ……………… 53 Automatic delivery ………………..53 Scanning/image capture system ………………..54 Scanner ……………………. 54 Automatic document feed system …………….54 Sensors in the document feeder …………..54 Document feeder paper path ………….. -
Page 10
HCI cassette media-size detection and cassette-presence detection ….79 HCI lift-up operation …………….. 80 HCI cassette media-presence detection …………81 HCI jam detection ………………..82 No pick jam 2 ………………82 No pick jam 3 ………………82 Residual paper jam 1 …………….83 Door open jam 1 ……………… -
Page 11
2 Solve problems ………………….111 Solve problems checklist ………………….. 112 Helpful printed pages ………………….114 Menu map ………………….114 Current settings pages ………………. 114 Preboot menu options ………………….115 Troubleshooting process ………………….122 Determine the problem source …………….. 122 Troubleshooting flowchart …………… 122 Power subsystem ……………….. -
Page 12
Set up an auto cleaning page ……….. 217 Print a configuration page …………… 218 Configuration page …………..218 HP embedded Jetdirect page ………… 219 Finding important information on the configuration pages …. 220 Control panel menus ………………..221 Administration menu …………….221 Reports menu ……………. -
Page 13
Network Settings menu …………275 Troubleshooting menu ………….. 289 Device Maintenance menu …………..293 Backup/Restore menu ………….. 293 Calibration/Cleaning menu …………294 USB Firmware Upgrade menu ……….. 295 Service menu …………….295 Interpret control-panel messages …………….296 Control-panel message types …………..296 Control-panel messages ……………. -
Page 14
13.B2.AX Jam in top cover area ……….309 13.B2.D1 Jam in tray 1 …………310 13.B2.D2 Jam in top cover area (tray 2) ……..310 13.B2.D3 Jam in top cover area (tray 3) (no optional input devices installed) …………..311 13.B2.D3 Jam in top cover area (tray 3) (optional input devices installed) ……………. -
Page 15
30.01.46 …………….327 30.03.14 …………….327 30.03.20 …………….328 30.03.22 …………….328 30.03.23 …………….328 30.03.30 …………….329 30.03.45 …………….329 31.01.47 …………….329 31.03.30 …………….329 31.03.31 …………….330 31.03.32 …………….330 31.08.A1 …………….331 31.08.A2 …………….331 31.08.A3 …………….331 31.13.01 ……………. -
Page 16
41.03.YZ Unexpected size in Tray <X> ……..343 41.03.YZ Unexpected size in Tray <X> To use another tray, touch «Options» …………….343 41.05.YZ Unexpected type in Tray <X> ……..344 41.05.YZ Unexpected type in Tray <X> To use another tray, touch «Options»… -
Page 17
69.11.YY Error To continue, touch “OK” ……..362 70.00.00 Error To continue turn off then on ……. 362 80.0X.YY Embedded Jetdirect Error ……….. 363 81.WX.00 Wireless Network Error To continue turn off then on ..364 81.WX.YZ Embedded JetDirect Error To continue turn off then on .. 365 81.YY.YY EIO Error To continue turn off then on …… -
Page 18
Card slot file operation failed To clear touch “Clear” ….375 Card slot file system is full To clear touch “Clear” ……375 Card slot is write protected To clear touch “Clear” …… 375 Card slot not initialized To clear touch “Clear” ……375 Cartridge ship mode ………….. -
Page 19
Load Tray <X>: [Size] To continue, touch “OK” ……384 Load Tray <X>: [Size] To use another tray, touch «Options» ..384 Load Tray <X>: [Type], [Size] ……….. 384 Load Tray <X>: [Type], [Size] To use another tray, touch «Options» …………….385 Manually feed output stack Then touch «OK»… -
Page 20
Tray <X> empty: [Type], [Size] ……….394 Tray <X> open ……………. 394 Tray <X> overfilled Remove excess paper ……..394 Tray <X> overfilled To use another tray, touch «Options» ….. 394 Type mismatch Tray <X> …………395 Unable to cancel firmware update job ……..395 Unable to install the firmware ……….. -
Page 21
Clear jams in the 3,500-sheet high-capacity tray …………418 Clear jams from the toner-cartridge area …………..421 Clear jams in the fuser ………………. 424 Clear jams from the duplexer ……………… 426 Solve paper-handling problems ………………..427 The product picks up multiple sheets of paper …………427 The product does not pick up paper ……………. -
Page 22
USB storage device (control-panel menu) ……….. 470 Appendix A Service and support ………………471 Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement …………….472 HP’s Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement ….474 HP policy on non-HP supplies ………………..475 HP anticounterfeit Web site ………………..476 Data stored on the toner cartridge ……………… -
Page 23
Power consumption ………………..489 Toner consumption ………………..489 Paper use ………………….489 Plastics ……………………. 489 HP LaserJet print supplies ………………490 Return and recycling instructions …………….490 United States and Puerto Rico …………..490 Multiple returns (more than one cartridge) ……..490 Single returns ……………. -
Page 24
EU Statement for Telecom Operation …………… 504 New Zealand Telecom Statements …………….504 Additional FCC statement for telecom products (US) ……….504 Telephone Consumer Protection Act (US) …………..505 Industry Canada CS-03 requirements …………..505 Vietnam Telecom wired/wireless marking for ICTQC Type approved products ….. 506 Japan Telecom Mark ………………… -
Page 25
List of tables Table 1-1 Operation sequence ………………….. 3 Table 1-2 Motor locations ……………………7 Table 1-3 Fan locations ……………………. 9 Table 1-4 Low voltage power supply DC power specifications …………..12 Table 1-5 Pickup, feed, and delivery system sensors and switches …………. 34 Table 1-6 Pickup, feed, and delivery system solenoid and motors …………. 36 Table 1-7 Media switch combinations ……………….. -
Page 26
Table 2-11 Tray/bin manual sensor test ………………..153 Table 2-12 Component tests ………………….. 185 Table 2-13 1×500-sheet paper deck cross section …………….. 189 Table 2-14 3×500-sheet paper deck cross section …………….. 190 Table 2-15 3,500-sheet HCI cross section ……………….. 191 Table 2-16 Important information on the configuration pages …………..220 Table 2-17 Reports menu …………………… -
Page 27
List of figures Figure 1-1 Function structure ……………………2 Figure 1-2 Engine control system ………………….4 Figure 1-3 DC controller PCA ……………………. 5 Figure 1-4 Motor locations ……………………7 Figure 1-5 Fan locations ……………………9 Figure 1-6 Low-voltage power-supply PCA ………………… 11 Figure 1-7 High-voltage power-supply PCA ……………….. 14 Figure 1-8 Fuser components …………………… -
Page 28
Figure 1-33 Skew-feed prevention ………………….45 Figure 1-34 Fuse and delivery block …………………. 47 Figure 1-35 Loop control ……………………48 Figure 1-36 Output bin media-full detection ……………….. 49 Figure 1-37 Product engine jam detection sensors and switches …………..51 Figure 1-38 Document feeder path for single-sided documents …………..55 Figure 1-39 Document feeder path for two-sided documents ………….. -
Page 29
Figure 1-74 Jogger guide in the alignment position …………….103 Figure 1-75 Leading end alienation roller activates …………….103 Figure 1-76 Alignment complete ………………….104 Figure 1-77 Jogger guide in the turnout position ………………. 105 Figure 1-78 Paper stack goes to the output bin ………………105 Figure 1-79 Paper stack goes to the output bin in stacker mode ………….. -
Page 30
Figure 2-34 Tray 4 paper feed sensor ………………..175 Figure 2-35 Tray 4 door open sensor ………………..176 Figure 2-36 Tray 5 paper sensor ………………….177 Figure 2-37 Tray paper surface sensor ………………..178 Figure 2-38 Tray 5 paper size sensor ………………..179 Figure 2-39 Tray 5 feed sensor ………………….180 Figure 2-40 HCI exit sensor …………………… -
Page 31
Figure 2-75 HP embedded Jetdirect page ……………….. 219 Figure 2-76 Sample event log ………………….400 Figure 2-77 Product base paper path and sensor locations (1 of 2) …………405 Figure 2-78 Product base paper path and sensor locations (2 of 2) …………405 Figure 2-79 1×500 paper feeder paper path and sensor locations …………405 Figure 2-80 1×500 and 3×500 paper deck paper path and sensor locations ……….. -
Page 32
ENWW… -
Page 33: Theory Of Operation
Theory of operation Basic operation ● Engine control system ● Laser scanner system ● Image-formation system ● Pickup, feed, and delivery system ● Scanning/image capture system ● 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 4) ● 1×500 and 3×500 paper feeder and stand ●…
-
Page 34: Basic Operation
Basic operation Function structure The product contains the following systems: Engine control system ● Laser scanner system ● Image-formation system ● Pickup, feed, and delivery system ● Accessory ● Figure 1-1 Function structure Laser scanner system Image-formation system Engine control system Pickup, feed, and delivery system Accessory Operation sequence…
-
Page 35: Table 1-1 Operation Sequence
Table 1-1 Operation sequence Period Duration Purpose WAIT period From the time the power switch Brings the product to the Ready state. is turned on, the door is closed Detects the failure of the low-voltage power supply ● or, product exits Sleep mode until the product is ready for a Detects the connection with the accessories ●…
-
Page 36: Engine Control System
Engine control system The engine-control system coordinates all the other systems, according to commands from the formatter. The engine-control system contains the following components: DC controller PCA ● Low-voltage power supply unit ● High-voltage power supply PCA ● Fuser control ●…
-
Page 37: Dc Controller Pca
DC controller PCA The DC controller PCA controls the product operation sequence. Figure 1-3 DC controller PCA AC input Low-voltage power supply Motor Fuser Solenoid Clutch High-voltage Transfer roller power supply Photointerrupter Cartridge DC controller Sensor Switch Control panel Duplex unit (Accessory) USB PCA Input source accessory…
-
Page 38
Component type Component Component name abbreviation Solenoid Tray 1 (MP tray) pickup solenoid Clutch Upper cassette pickup clutch Lower cassette pickup clutch Rear fan Front fan Fuser fan Photointerrupter Cartridge presence sensor MP tray media out sensor Output sensor Output bin media full sensor Lower cassette media out sensor Loop sensor Upper cassette media out sensor… -
Page 39: Motor Control
Motor control The product uses five motors for the paper-feed and image-formation process. Motor locations The following figure shows the product motor locations. Figure 1-4 Motor locations Table 1-2 Motor locations Motor Components driven by motor Drum motor Photosensitive drum, transfer roller, registration roller, MP tray pickup roller, cassette pickup roller, and feed roller Scanner motor Laser scanner mirror…
-
Page 40: Failure Detection
Failure detection The DC controller monitors the following motors to determine a motor failure: Drum motor ● Scanner motor ● Fuser motor ● The DC controller determines if the motor has failed and notifies the formatter when the motor encounters the following conditions: Startup failure—The motor does not reach a specified rotational count within a specified time from ●…
-
Page 41: Fan Control
Fan control The product has three fans to prevent the temperature from rising in the product and to cool down the delivered paper. Fan locations The following figure shows the product fan locations. Figure 1-5 Fan locations Table 1-3 Fan locations Cooling area Type Speed…
-
Page 42: Failure Detection
Failure detection The DC controller determines if the fan has failed and notifies the formatter when the fan stops rotating for a specified time during start-up. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW…
-
Page 43: Low-Voltage Power-Supply Pca
Low-voltage power-supply PCA The low-voltage power supply converts AC power into the DC voltage that product components use. Figure 1-6 Low-voltage power-supply PCA AC input Low-voltage power supply High-voltage power supply DC controller Interlock High-voltage switch Power fuse circuit +24VD Fuser circuit Power fuse Zerocross…
-
Page 44: Over-Current/Over-Voltage/Overload Protection
Table 1-4 Low voltage power supply DC power specifications DC voltage Behavior +24V +24VB Off during Sleep mode (sleep level1, active off and inactive off) +24VC Off during Sleep mode (sleep level1, active off and inactive off), interrupted when the left door opens +24VD Off during Sleep mode (sleep level1, active off and inactive off), interrupted when the left door or…
-
Page 45: Power Supply Voltage Detection
Power supply voltage detection The power supply voltage detection controls the fuser properly according to the voltage. The DC controller detects whether the low-voltage power supply voltage is 100V or 220V, according to the POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE signal (/PSTYP100). Sleep mode The Sleep mode reduces the power consumption of the product.
-
Page 46: High-Voltage Power-Supply Pca
High-voltage power-supply PCA The high-voltage power supply applies positive or negative voltage biases to the following components: Primary charging roller ● Developing roller ● Transfer roller ● Static charge eliminator ● Fuser film ● Figure 1-7 High-voltage power-supply PCA Fuser Fuser film Pressure roller DC controller…
-
Page 47
Static charge eliminator bias ● The static charge eliminator bias is used to improve the paper-feed performance and image- quality. The static charge eliminator bias circuit generates the bias. Fusing bias ● The fusing bias is used to improve the image-quality. The primary charging bias circuit generates the bias. -
Page 48: Fuser Control
Fuser control The fuser heater control circuit and the fuser heater safety circuit control the fuser temperature according to commands from the DC controller. The product uses an on-demand fusing method. Figure 1-8 Fuser components H1/H2 Fuser film Pressure roller FUSER TEMPERATURE signal FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal Fuser heater…
-
Page 49: Figure 1-9 Fuser Control System
Component Function Sub thermistor 1 Detects the temperature at ends of the fuser heater (contact type) Sub thermistor 2 Sub thermistor 3 Figure 1-9 Fuser control system AC input DC controller Low-voltage power supply Zerocross detection /ZEROX circuit High-voltage power supply RL1001 Relay drive circuit RL1002…
-
Page 50: Fuser Temperature Control
Fuser temperature control The fuser temperature control maintains the temperature of the fuser heater at its targeted temperature. The DC controller monitors the FUSER TEMPERATURE signals (MFSRTH, S1FSRTH, S2FSRTH and S3FSRTH), and sends the FUSER HEATER CONTROL signals (FSRD1 and FSRD2). The fuser heater control circuit controls the fuser heater depending on the signals, so that the fuser heater remains at the targeted temperature.
-
Page 51: Fuser Failure Detection
Fuser failure detection The DC controller determines if the fuser functions properly. The DC controller determines a fuser failure, interrupts the power supply to the fuser heater, and notifies the formatter of a failure state when it encounters the following conditions: Abnormally high temperature 1 ●…
-
Page 52: Pressure Roller Cleaning
Drive circuit failure ● The frequency of the ZEROCROSS signal is not detected in a specified value range within a specified period after power-on. The frequency of the ZEROCROSS signal is not detected in a specified value range for a specified period after power-on and once the signal is detected.
-
Page 53: Laser Scanner System
Laser scanner system The DC controller controls the laser scanner system according to commands from the formatter. The DC controller controls the internal components in the laser scanner system to form the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum according to the VIDEO signals. The following are the main components of the laser scanner system: Laser assembly ●…
-
Page 54: Laser Scanner Failure Detection
Laser scanner failure detection The DC controller determines a laser scanner failure and notifies the formatter of the error state when any of the following conditions occurs: Beam detect (BD) failure ● A specified BD interval is not detected within a specified period during the scanner motor drive. Scanner motor start-up failure ●…
-
Page 55: Image-Formation System
Image-formation system The DC controller controls the image-formation system according to commands from the formatter. The DC controller controls the internal components of the image-formation system to form the toner image on the photosensitive drum surface. The toner image is transferred to the paper and fused. The following are the main components of the image-formation system: Cartridge ●…
-
Page 56: Figure 1-12 Image-Formation Components
The DC controller rotates the drum motor to drive the following components: Photosensitive drum ● Developing roller (follows the photosensitive drum) ● Primary charging roller (follows the photosensitive drum) ● Transfer roller ● The DC controller rotates the fuser motor to drive the following components: Pressure roller ●…
-
Page 57: Image-Formation Process
Image-formation process The image-formation process consists of seven steps divided into five functional blocks: Latent-image-formation system ● Step 1: Primary charging ◦ Step 2: Laser-beam exposure ◦ Developing system ● Step 3: Developing ◦ Transfer system ● Step 4: Transfer ◦…
-
Page 58: Step 2: Laser-Beam Exposure
charging bias is applied to the primary charging roller to keep a negative potential on the drum surface. Figure 1-14 Primary charging Primary charging roller Primary charging bias Photosensitive drum Step 2: Laser-beam exposure The laser-beam strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum to neutralize the negative charge. An electrostatic latent image forms where the negative charge was neutralized.
-
Page 59: Transfer Block
image on the photosensitive drum because the drum surface has a higher potential. The latent image becomes visible on the drum. Figure 1-16 Developing Developing roller Developer blade Developing bias Photosensitive drum Transfer block During the two steps that comprise this block, a toner image on the photosensitive drum transfers to the paper.
-
Page 60: Figure 1-18 Separation From The Drum
eliminator. The static charge eliminator reduces backside static discharge of the paper after the transfer process for stable paper-feed and print-quality. Figure 1-18 Separation from the drum Photosensitive drum Paper Static charge eliminator Transfer roller Static charge eliminator bias Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW…
-
Page 61: Fuser Block
Fuser block Until the fusing stage is complete, the image is not permanently affixed to the paper. The toner can be easily smudged until the heat and pressure of the fusing process fix the image to the sheet. Step 6: Fusing Heat and pressure melt the toner as the paper passes through the rollers.
-
Page 62: Figure 1-21 Toner Cartridge Components
Primary charging roller ● Memory tag ● Figure 1-21 Toner cartridge components DC controller High-voltage power supply Drum motor Cartridge Memory Tag Developing roller Primary charging roller Photosensitive drum The cartridge serves a role in the following functions: Memory tag ●…
-
Page 63: Other Image-Formation Functions
The DC controller detects the remaining toner level in a cartridge according to the TONER LEVEL signal. The DC controller determines a cartridge low warning or cartridge end-of-life when the toner level drops below a specified level and notifies the formatter. Cartridge-life detection ●…
-
Page 64: Environment Change Control
The transfer roller cleaning is performed during the WAIT period, INTR period, LSTR period, and after forming the image for the front side of the page when duplex printing. Figure 1-23 Transfer roller cleaning Cleaning blade Photosensitive drum Toner collection box Transfer roller Reverse transfer bias Environment change control…
-
Page 65: Pickup, Feed, And Delivery System
Pickup, feed, and delivery system The DC controller controls the pickup, feed, and delivery system according to commands from the formatter. The DC controller controls each block to pickup, feed, and deliver the paper. The pickup, feed, and delivery system consists of following three functional blocks: Pickup-and-feed block ●…
-
Page 66: Table 1-5 Pickup, Feed, And Delivery System Sensors And Switches
Figure 1-25 Pickup, feed, and delivery system sensors and switches SR12 SR10 SR11 Table 1-5 Pickup, feed, and delivery system sensors and switches Component Signal Left door interlock switch LEFT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal Cartridge door interlock switch CARTRIDGE DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal Cartridge door open detection switch CARTRIDGE DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal Upper cassette media width switch…
-
Page 67
Table 1-5 Pickup, feed, and delivery system sensors and switches (continued) Component Signal Lower cassette media out sensor LOWER CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal Loop sensor LOOP LEVEL signal Upper cassette media out sensor UPPER CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal Right door sensor RIGHT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal TOP sensor TOP signal… -
Page 68: Table 1-6 Pickup, Feed, And Delivery System Solenoid And Motors
Figure 1-26 Pickup, feed, and delivery-system solenoid and motors Table 1-6 Pickup, feed, and delivery system solenoid and motors Component Signal MP tray pickup solenoid MP TRAY PICKUP SOLENOID signal Upper cassette pickup clutch UPPER CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH signal Lower cassette pickup clutch LOWER CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH signal Drum motor DRUM MOTOR CONTROL signal…
-
Page 69: Pickup-And-Feed Block
Pickup-and-feed block The pickup-and-feed block picks one sheet of paper from the cassette or the MP tray and feeds it into the fuser. Figure 1-27 Pickup-and-feed block Pickup, feed, and delivery system ENWW…
-
Page 70: Cassette Pickup
Cassette pickup The product picks up one sheet of paper from the cassette. The following figure shows the cassette pickup mechanism. Both trays have the same mechanism. Figure 1-28 Cassette pickup mechanism DC controller Drum motor Cassette pickup clutch Cassette pickup roller Feed roller Cassette separation roller The operational sequence of the cassette pickup is as follows:…
-
Page 71: Cassette Lift Operation
The cassette media-size detection and the cassette-presence detection are not performed during Sleep mode. The following table lists the combination of the switches. Table 1-7 Media switch combinations Paper size Cassette media width switch Cassette media end switch Center Bottom Center Bottom Cassette…
-
Page 72: Cassette Media-Presence Detection
When a print job is not sent for a specified period, the DC controller reverses the cassette lifter motor until the cassette lift-up sensor stops sensing the lifter rack. When the casette lift-up sensor keeps sensing the lifter rack for a specified period from when the lift- down operation starts, the DC controller determines a cassette lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter.
-
Page 73: Figure 1-30 Cassette Multiple-Feed Prevention
When multiple sheets are picked up, the cassette separation roller does not rotate and only one sheet is fed into the product. Figure 1-30 Cassette multiple-feed prevention Cassette pickup roller Cassette separation roller Paper The cassette separation roller does not rotate. <Normal-feed>…
-
Page 74: Mp Tray Pickup
MP tray pickup The product picks up one sheet of paper from the MP tray. Figure 1-31 MP tray pickup DC controller Drum motor MP tray pickup solenoid MP tray Paper media out sensor MP tray pickup roller MP tray separation pad Lifting plate The operational sequence of the MP tray pickup is as follows: The DC controller rotates the drum motor when it receives a print command from the formatter.
-
Page 75: Mp Tray Multiple-Feed Prevention
MP tray multiple-feed prevention The product uses a MP tray separation pad to prevent multiple sheets of paper from entering into the product at one time. When multiple sheets are picked up, multiple sheets stop due to the friction against the MP tray separation pad, and only one page is fed into the product.
-
Page 76
Print mode Feed-speed Glossy media 3 — Glossy film — Photo media 1 — Photo media 2 — Photo media 3 — Envelope 1 Envelope 2 Envelope 3 — Label — Designated media 1 — Designated media 2 — Designated media 3 —… -
Page 77: Skew-Feed Prevention
Skew-feed prevention The product uses a registration shutter to correct the skew feed without decreasing the feeding speed. Figure 1-33 Skew-feed prevention Feed roller Registration shutter Paper Registration shutter Paper Feed roller The operational sequence of the skew-feed prevention is as follows: The leading edge of paper strikes the registration shutter as the paper is fed.
-
Page 78: Media-Length Detection
Media-length detection The DC controller detects the length of paper to prevent toner stain on the transfer roller and also to minimize jam occurrences in the duplexer. The DC controller measures the length of paper by monitoring the time from when the leading edge of paper reaches the TOP sensor until the trailing edge passes through, and then determines the paper size.
-
Page 79: Fuse And Delivery Block
Fuse and delivery block The fuse and delivery block fuses the toner image onto the paper and delivers the printed page to the face-down output bin. Figure 1-34 Fuse and delivery block Output bin Pickup, feed, and delivery system ENWW…
-
Page 80: Loop Control
Loop control The product controls the loop of paper to prevent print-quality and paper-feed defects. If the fuser film/pressure roller rotates slower than the photosensitive drum/transfer roller, the ● paper loop increases. If the fuser film/pressure roller rotates faster than the photosensitive drum/transfer roller, the paper ●…
-
Page 81: Output Bin Media-Full Detection
Output bin media-full detection The DC controller detects whether the output bin is full by monitoring the output bin media full sensor. Figure 1-36 Output bin media-full detection DC controller Output bin media full sensor Paper Output bin media full sensor lever Output bin When the output-bin media-full sensor detects paper for a specified period during a print operation, the…
-
Page 82: Jam Detection
Jam detection The product uses the following sensors and switches to detect the presence of paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed: Left door interlock switch (SW1) ● Cartridge door interlock switch (SW2) ●…
-
Page 83: No Pick Jam 1
Output bin media full sensor (SR4) ● Right door sensor (SR8) ● Figure 1-37 Product engine jam detection sensors and switches SR12 No pick jam 1 MP tray ● The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period (including two retries) from when the MP tray pickup solenoid is turned on.
-
Page 84: Feed Stay Jam 1
The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the paper passes through the duplex waiting position. Input accessory ● The TOP sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the following sensors detect the leading edge, depending on the input accessory that is installed.
-
Page 85: Residual Paper Jam 1
Residual paper jam 1 Either one of the following sensors detects a paper-presence when the product is turned on or when the door is closed: TOP sensor ● Loop sensor ● Fuser output sensor ● Either one of the following sensors detects a paper-presence when the automatic delivery is complete: TOP sensor ●…
-
Page 86: Scanning/Image Capture System
Scanning/image capture system Scanner The scanner is a carriage-type platen scanner which includes the frame, glass, LED optics, and a scanner controller board (SCB) attached to the back of the assembly. The scanner has two sensors to detect legal and ledger/A3 sized media and a switch to indicate when the document feeder is open. The document feeder and control-panel assembly are attached to the scanner assembly.
-
Page 87: Document Feeder Paper Path
Document feeder paper path The document feeder feeds documents past the document feeder glass for scanning. Figure 1-38 Document feeder path for single-sided documents Separation pad Document feeder input tray Pickup roller Delivery/duplex-feed rollers Stack stop Document feeder glass Pre-pick roller Document feeder feed rollers For two-sided documents, the delivery rollers reverse the direction of each page to feed the second side of the document past the document feeder glass.
-
Page 88: Figure 1-39 Document Feeder Path For Two-Sided Documents
Figure 1-39 Document feeder path for two-sided documents NOTE: Callouts in Figure 1-39 Document feeder path for two-sided documents on page 56 identical to callouts in Figure 1-38 Document feeder path for single-sided documents on page 55 Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW…
-
Page 89: 500-Sheet Paper Feeder (Tray 4)
500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 4) The paper feeder is optionally installed at bottom of the product. It picks up the paper and feeds it to the product. The paper feeder controller controls the operational sequence of the paper feeder. Figure 1-40 500-sheet paper feeder paper path PF cassette pickup roller 500-sheet paper feeder…
-
Page 90: 500-Sheet Paper Feeder Motor Control
Figure 1-41 500-sheet paper feeder signal flow 500-sheet paper feeder Motor +24V Solenoid PF controller DC controller Photointerrupter Switch Table 1-8 500-sheet paper feeder electrical components Component Abbreviation Component name Motor PF cassette pickup motor PF cassette lifter motor Solenoid PF cassette pickup solenoid Photointerrupter PF cassette media feed sensor…
-
Page 91: 500-Sheet Paper Feeder Failure Detection
Table 1-9 500-sheet paper feeder motors Motor Components driven PF cassette pickup motor Pickup roller, separation roller, and feed roller for the PF cassette PF cassette lifter motor Lifter for the PF cassette 500-sheet paper feeder failure detection The paper feeder controller determines a cassette lifter motor failure according to the condition of the related part.
-
Page 92: 500-Sheet Paper Feeder Cassette Pickup
500-sheet paper feeder cassette pickup The paper feeder picks up one sheet of paper from the cassette. Figure 1-44 500-sheet paper feeder pickup and feed cassette pickup PF controller PF cassette pickup motor 1. Cassette pickup cam rotates PF cassette feed roller 2.
-
Page 93: 500-Sheet Paper Feeder Lift-Up Operation
The cassette media-size detection and the cassette-presence detection are not performed during Sleep mode. Table 1-11 500-sheet paper feeder media switch combinations Paper size Cassette media width switch Cassette media end switch Center Bottom Center Bottom Cassette absence A5-R B5-R Executive-R Letter-R A4-R…
-
Page 94: 500-Sheet Paper Feeder Cassette Media-Presence Detection
The operational sequence of the lift-up is as follows: The lifter motor rotates to raise the lifter. The lifter motor stops when the PF cassette media stack surface sensor detects the paper surface. The lifter motor rotates again when the PF cassette media stack surface sensor detects that the stack surface lowers during a print operation.
-
Page 95: 500-Sheet Paper Feeder Jam Detection
its own driving force and the multiple-fed sheets are pushed back to the cassette. Therefore, a single sheet is fed into the product. Figure 1-46 500-sheet paper feeder multiple-feed prevention PF cassette feed roller PF cassette pickup roller Driving force transmitted from the PF cassette feed roller Paper Driving force transmitted from…
-
Page 96: Door Open Jam 1
Door open jam 1 A PF right door open is detected during a paper feed operation. 500-sheet paper feeder automatic delivery The paper feeder automatically clears the paper if the paper feeder cassette media feed sensor detects the residual paper when the product is turned on or when the door is closed. Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW…
-
Page 97: 1X500 And 3X500 Paper Feeder And Stand
1×500 and 3×500 paper feeder and stand The 1×500-sheet paper deck is optionally installed at bottom of the product or the 500-sheet paper feeder. The 3×500-sheet paper deck is optionally installed at bottom of the product only. Each of the paper decks picks up the paper and feeds it to the product.
-
Page 98: Figure 1-48 Paper Deck Paper Path
Figure 1-48 Paper deck paper path Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 PD cassette feed roller PD cassette pickup roller 3×500-sheet paper deck PD cassette separation roller Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW…
-
Page 99: Table 1-12 Paper Deck Electrical Components
Figure 1-49 Paper deck signal flow Paper deck cassette 1 Motor +24V Solenoid DC controller PD controller 1 Sensor Switch (3×500 only) Paper deck cassette 2 Motor (3×500 only) PD controller 2 Solenoid Sensor Paper deck cassette 3 Motor (3×500 only) Solenoid PD controller 3 Sensor…
-
Page 100
Table 1-12 Paper deck electrical components (continued) Component Abbreviation Component name Solenoid PD cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL82 PD cassette 2 pickup solenoid SL92 PD cassette 3 pickup solenoid Photointerrupter PD cassette 1 media feed sensor PD cassette 1 media feed sensor PD cassette 1 media out sensor SR81 PD cassette 2 media feed sensor… -
Page 101: Paper Deck Motor Control
Paper deck motor control The paper deck has two motors in each cassette for the paper-feed and cassette lift-up. Figure 1-50 Paper deck motors PD cassette lifter motor PD cassette pickup motor Table 1-13 Paper deck motors Motor Components driven PD cassette 1 pickup motor Pickup roller, separation roller, and feed roller for the PD cassette 1 PD cassette 1 lifter motor…
-
Page 102: Table 1-14 Paper Deck Pickup-And-Feed Operation Components
NOTE: The following figure illustrates the mechanism for paper deck cassette 3, but each paper deck cassette has the same mechanism. Figure 1-51 Paper deck pickup-and-feed components Cassette 1 Cassette 2 SR91 SR93 SR92 Cassette 3 SW92 SW93 SL91 Table 1-14 Paper deck pickup-and-feed operation components Abbreviation Component…
-
Page 103: Paper Deck Cassette Media-Size Detection And Cassette-Presence Detection
Table 1-14 Paper deck pickup-and-feed operation components (continued) Abbreviation Component Signal SW83 PD cassette 2 media end switch PD CASSETTE 2 MEDIA END signal PD cassette 3 pickup motor PD CASSETTE 3 PICKUP MOTOR CONTROL signal PD cassette 3 lifter motor PD CASSETTE 3 LIFTER MOTOR CONTROL signal SL91 PD cassette 3 pickup solenoid…
-
Page 104: Paper Deck Lift-Up Operation
Table 1-15 Paper deck media switch combinations (continued) Paper size Cassette media-width switch Cassette media-end switch Center Bottom Center Bottom Ledger Paper deck lift-up operation The paper deck lifts up the tray to keep the surface of paper at the pickup position whenever the following occurs: The product is turned on ●…
-
Page 105: Paper Deck Cassette Media-Presence Detection
The paper deck controller 3 determines a PD cassette 3 lifter motor failure and notifies the formatter through the DC controller when the PD cassette 3 media stack surface sensor does not detect the paper surface within a specified period from when the PD cassette 3 lifter motor starts rotating. Paper deck cassette media-presence detection The paper deck controller detects whether the paper is loaded in the cassette by monitoring the PD cassette media out sensor.
-
Page 106: No Pick Jam 3 (3X500-Sheet Paper Deck Only)
The PD cassette 1 media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when the PD cassette 3 media feed sensor detects the leading edge. (3×500-sheet paper deck only) No pick jam 3 (3×500-sheet paper deck only) The PD cassette 2 media feed sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period (including two retries) from when the PD cassette 2 pickup solenoid is turned on.
-
Page 107: 3,500-Sheet High-Capacity Input (Hci) Feeder
3,500-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) feeder The 3,500-sheet paper deck is optionally installed at bottom of the product or the 500-sheet paper feeder. It picks up the paper and feeds it into the product. The HCI controller controls the operational sequence of the 3,500-sheet paper deck. Figure 1-54 HCI paper path 3,500-sheet paper deck…
-
Page 108: Table 1-16 Hci Electrical Components
Figure 1-55 HCI signal flow 3,500-sheet paper deck Motor +24V Solenoid HCI controller DC controller Photointerrupter Switch Table 1-16 HCI electrical components Component Abbreviation Component name Motor M3301 HCI right cassette pickup motor M3302 HCI right cassette lifter motor M3303 HCI left cassette lifter motor M3304 HCI left cassette pickup motor…
-
Page 109: Hci Motor Control
HCI motor control The HCI uses two motors in each cassette for paper-feed and cassette lift-up. Figure 1-56 HCI motors HCI cassette pickup motor HCI cassette lifter motor Table 1-17 HCI motors Motor Components driven M3301 HCI right cassette pickup motor Pickup roller, separation roller, and feed roller for the HCI right cassette M3302…
-
Page 110: Hci Pickup-And-Feed Operation
HCI pickup-and-feed operation The pickup-and-feed operation picks up one sheet of paper in the 3,500-sheet paper deck cassette and feeds it into the product. Figure 1-57 HCI pickup-and-feed operation M3304 M3301 SL3302 PS3301 PS3203 PS3305 PS3306 PS3302 PS3201 PS3202 PS3103 PS3101 PS3102 SL3301…
-
Page 111: Hci Cassette Media-Size Detection And Cassette-Presence Detection
Table 1-18 HCI pickup-and-feed operation components (continued) Abbreviation Component Signal PS3103 HCI right cassette media out sensor HCI RIGHT CASSETTE MEDIA OUT signal PS3201 HCI left cassette media stack surface 2 sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 2 signal PS3202 HCI left cassette media stack surface 1 sensor HCI LEFT CASSETTE MEDIA STACK SURFACE 1…
-
Page 112: Hci Lift-Up Operation
HCI lift-up operation The HCI lifts up the tray to keep the surface of the paper at the pickup position whenever the following occurs: The product is turned on ● The cassette is installed ● The paper stack surface lowers by pickup operation ●…
-
Page 113: Hci Cassette Media-Presence Detection
HCI cassette media-presence detection The HCI controller detects whether paper is loaded in the cassette by monitoring the HCI cassette media out sensor. The cassette media-presence detection is not performed during Sleep mode. When the HCI cassette media out sensor does not detect the paper, the HCI controller determines a media-absence, and it notifies the formatter through the DC controller.
-
Page 114: Hci Jam Detection
HCI jam detection The HCI uses the following sensors to detect the presence of paper and to check whether paper is being fed correctly or has jammed: HCI media feed sensor (PS3301) ● HCI right cassette media feed sensor (PS3302) ●…
-
Page 115: Residual Paper Jam 1
Residual paper jam 1 Either one of the following sensors detects a paper-presence when the automatic delivery is complete: HCI media feed sensor ● HCI right cassette media feed sensor ● HCI left cassette media feed sensor ● Door open jam 1 An HCI right door open or an HCI long edge feed guide open is detected during a paper-feed operation.
-
Page 116: Duplexer
Duplexer The optional duplexer is installed on the left side of the product. The duplexer reverses the output roller and intermediate output roller in the product engine, reverses and feeds the paper passed through the fuser. Then, it detects side misregistration to adjust the starting position of the scanning direction for the second side of paper according to the command from the formatter and feeds it to the product engine.
-
Page 117: Table 1-19 Duplexer Electrical Components
Figure 1-61 Duplexer signal flow Duplex unit Motor Clutch +24V DC controller Duplex controller Photointerrupter Side misregistration sensor Photoreceiver sensor NVRAM Table 1-19 Duplexer electrical components Component Abbreviation Component name Motor Duplex feed motor Duplex fan Clutch Duplex feed clutch Photointerrupter Duplex reverse sensor Duplex re-pickup sensor…
-
Page 118: Duplexer Motor Control
Duplexer motor control The duplexer has one motor. The duplex feed motor reverses the output roller and the intermediate output roller. Also, it drives the duplex reverse roller and the duplex re-pickup roller to feed the paper and to drive the side misregistration sensor and the re-pickup roller. Figure 1-62 Duplexer motor Duplex feed motor…
-
Page 119: Duplexer Fan Control
Duplexer fan control The duplex unit has one fan for preventing the temperature from rising in the duplex unit. The duplex controller determines if the duplex fan has failed and notifies the formatter through the DC controller when the fan fails to operate for a specified time during start-up. Figure 1-63 Duplexer fan Duplex fan…
-
Page 120: Duplexer Reverse-And-Feed Operation
Duplexer reverse-and-feed operation The duplexer reverses the feed and delivery rollers in the product to print on both sides. The paper that passed through the fuser unit reverses its feeding direction and is fed to the duplexer. The duplexer feeds the paper and performs horizontal registration to align the starting position of the main scan for the second-side print.
-
Page 121: Duplexer Reverse-And Feed-Operation Sequence
Duplexer reverse-and feed-operation sequence The operational sequence of the reverse-and-feed operation is as follows: The paper printed on the first side passes through the fuser. The DC controller feeds the paper until the trailing edge of paper reaches the reverse position, after the fuser output sensor detects the trailing edge.
-
Page 122: Figure 1-65 Duplexer Side Misregistration Detection
formatter through the DC controller as a correction value of scanning start position for the second side printing. Figure 1-65 Duplexer side misregistration detection Outline of LED ass ’ y LED for LED for paper right edge detection home-position detection LED for A4-R/A3 size detection LED for Letter-R…
-
Page 123: Side Misregistration Failure Detection
Side misregistration failure detection The duplex controller determines a side misregistration sensor failure and notifies the formatter when it encounters any one of the following condition: The photoreceiver sensor does not output as prescribed when the product is turned on, when the ●…
-
Page 124: Duplexer Jam Detection
Duplexer jam detection The duplexer uses the following sensors to detect the presence of paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed: Duplex reverse sensor (SR1) ● Duplex re-pickup sensor (SR2) ● Figure 1-66 Duplexer jam detection sensors Simplex paper path Duplex paper path…
-
Page 125: Fuser Output Stay Jam 2
Fuser output stay jam 2 The fuser output sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a specified period from when it detects the leading edge. Reverse jam 1 The duplex reverse sensor does not detect the leading edge of paper within a specified period from when a reverse operation starts.
-
Page 126: Stapler/Stacker
Stapler/stacker The stapler/stacker is an option installed between the product and the scanner assembly. It delivers the printed page directly to the output bin or delivers the printed page after stapling the page. The stapler/ stacker controller that is connected to the formatter controls the operational sequence of the stapler/ stacker.
-
Page 127: Figure 1-68 Stapler/Stacker Signal Flow
Figure 1-68 Stapler/stacker signal flow Staple stacker Motor Low-voltage power supply Solenoid Staple stacker Sensor controller Formatter +24V Switch +24V Connector PCA Stapler Component Abbreviation Component name Motor M2100 Jogger motor M2101 Feed motor M2102 Alignment-alienation motor — Stapler motor Solenoid SL2100 Flapper solenoid…
-
Page 128: Stapler/Stacker Motor Control
Stapler/stacker motor control The stapler/stacker has four motors for the paper-feed, alignment and stapling. Figure 1-69 Stapler/stacker motor locations Alignment-alienation motor Feed motor Jogger motor Stapler (Stapler motor) Component name Components driven M2100 Jogger motor Jogger guide M2101 Feed motor Feed roller and output lower roller M2102 Alignment-alienation motor…
-
Page 129: Stapler/Stacker Failure Detection
Stapler/stacker failure detection The stapler/stacker controller determines a motor failure according to the condition of the following related part: Jogger motor failure ● The stapler/stacker controller determines a jogger motor failure and notifies the formatter when it encounters the following conditions: The jogger guide in home-position does not move from its home-position within a specified ◦…
-
Page 130: Stapler/Stacker Feed And Delivery Operation
Stapler/stacker feed and delivery operation The stapler/stacker has the following three modes for the feed-and-delivery operation: Staple mode: Staples the paper and piles the stacks on the output bin ● Stack align mode: Does not staple the paper, but aligns the paper stack and delivers to the output ●…
-
Page 131
Abbreviation Component Signal SR2100 Inlet sensor INLET signal SR2101 Left door sensor LEFT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal SR2102 Jogger position sensor JOGGER POSITION signal SR2103 Output sensor OUTPUT signal SR2105 Swing alienation sensor SWING ALIENATION signal SR2106 Output bin media full sensor OUTPUT BIN MEDIA FULL signal —… -
Page 132: Staple Mode/Stack Align Mode
Staple mode/stack align mode Staple mode aligns, staples the paper stack and then delivers it to the output bin. Stack align mode aligns the paper stack and delivers the paper to the output bin without stapling. The operation of the stack align mode is the same as the staple mode except for the stapling operation. The operational sequence of the staple mode is as follows: After receiving the command from the DC controller, the stapler/stacker controller turns on the flapper solenoid to move the output flapper in the product and delivers the paper to the stapler/…
-
Page 133: Figure 1-72 Jogger Guide In The Waiting Position
The stapler/stacker controller prompts the jogger motor to move the jogger guide to the waiting position from the turnout position. Figure 1-72 Jogger guide in the waiting position Jogger guide M2100 Jogger motor Waiting position Turnout position After the jogger guide moves to the waiting position, the stapler/stacker controller drives the alignment-alienation motor to engage the output upper roller and the output lower roller.
-
Page 134: Figure 1-73 Alignment-Alienation Motor Separates Output Rollers
When the paper reaches a specified position in the jogger guide, the stapler/stacker controller drives the alignment-alienation motor to separate the output upper roller from the output lower roller and the paper is released. Figure 1-73 Alignment-alienation motor separates output rollers M2102 Alignment-alienation motor Jogger guide…
-
Page 135: Figure 1-74 Jogger Guide In The Alignment Position
When the paper is released, the stapler/stacker controller drives the jogger motor at the same time to move the jogger guide to the alignment position (width of paper) and aligns both sides of the paper. Figure 1-74 Jogger guide in the alignment position Jogger guide Paper Alignment position…
-
Page 136: Figure 1-76 Alignment Complete
After the alignment operation is complete, the stapler/stacker controller turns on the stamp solenoid and the stamp clamps against the paper, so that the paper on the jogger guide is not pushed out by the following paper. At the same time, the stapler/stacker controller moves the jogger guide and the leading end alignment roller to the waiting position.
-
Page 137: Figure 1-77 Jogger Guide In The Turnout Position
The stapler/stacker controller moves the jogger guide to the turnout position. Figure 1-77 Jogger guide in the turnout position Jogger guide Paper Waiting position Turnout position The paper stack then drops to the output bin. Figure 1-78 Paper stack goes to the output bin M2102 Alignment-alienation motor Output upper roller…
-
Page 138: Stacker Mode
Stacker mode In stacker mode, the product does not staple the printed page and delivers it directly to the output bin. Figure 1-79 Paper stack goes to the output bin in stacker mode Output bin Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW…
-
Page 139: Stapler/Stacker Jam Detection
Stapler/stacker jam detection The stapler/stacker uses the following sensors to detect the presence of paper and to check whether the paper is being fed correctly or has jammed: Inlet sensor (SR2100) ● Output sensor (SR2103) ● Figure 1-80 Stapler/stacker jam sensors SR2103 Output sensor SR2100…
-
Page 140: Residual Paper Jam
Residual paper jam Either one of the following sensors detects a paper-presence during the WAIT period when the product is turned on, when the door is closed, or when the product exits the power save mode: Inlet sensor ● Output sensor ●…
-
Page 141: Stapler
Stapler The stapler staples the printed pages. It consists of the staple cartridge and the stapler assembly. The staple cartridge holds up to 5,000 staples. The staple out sensor detects the presence of a staple. The staple ready sensor detects whether the staple is in the correct position to staple or not. The staple assembly is equipped with the stapler motor.
-
Page 142
Chapter 1 Theory of operation ENWW… -
Page 143: Solve Problems
Solve problems Solve problems checklist ● Helpful printed pages ● Preboot menu options ● Troubleshooting process ● Tools for troubleshooting ● Clear jams ● Solve paper-handling problems ● Use manual print modes ● Print quality troubleshooting tools ● Solve image-quality problems ●…
-
Page 144: Solve Problems Checklist
Print an internal page: Print a configuration page. If the product is connected to a network, an HP Jetdirect page ▲ also prints.
-
Page 145
● sure that you are using the print driver for this product. The print driver is on the CD that came with the product. You can also download the print driver from www.hp.com/go/ ljMFPM725_software. Print using a different program: Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution ▲… -
Page 146: Helpful Printed Pages
Helpful printed pages Menu map A printed Menu map can help you navigate the complete Administration menu more easily. To print a Menu map: From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. Open the following menus: Reports ●…
-
Page 147: Preboot Menu Options
2 Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost. HP does not recommend this action without contacting HP support first. Access the Preboot menu Turn the product on.
-
Page 148
Table 2-1 Preboot menu options (1 of 6) (continued) Menu option First level Second level Third level Description 3 Administrator This item navigates to the 3 Administrator sub menus. If authentication is required (and the user is not already signed in), the 2 Sign In displays. -
Page 149: Table 2-2 Preboot Menu Options (2 Of 6)
Table 2-2 Preboot menu options (2 of 6) Menu option First level Second level Third level Description 3 Administrator 6 Manage 1 Clear disk Select the 1 Clear disk item to enable an external device for Disk job storage. Job storage is normally enabled only for the continued Boot device.
-
Page 150: Table 2-3 Preboot Menu Options (3 Of 6)
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are reinstalled. The process erases the HP High Performance Secure Hard Disk. The disk becomes a non-encrypted disk. 3 Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.
-
Page 151: Table 2-4 Preboot Menu Options (4 Of 6)
Table 2-4 Preboot menu options (4 of 6) Menu option First level Second level Third level Description 3 Administrator 7 Configure Select the 7 Configure LAN item to setup the network settings for the Preboot menu firmware upgrade. continued The network can be configured to obtain the network settings from a DHCP server or as static.
-
Page 152: Table 2-6 Preboot Menu Options (6 Of 6)
Table 2-5 Preboot menu options (5 of 6) (continued) Menu option First level Second level Third level Description 3 Administrator 8 Startup 7 First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the product to Options initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on. continued continued For example, the user is prompted to configure first-time settings…
-
Page 153
The logs can be copied to a USB storage accessory when the product is initialized, and then these encrypted files can be sent to HP to help determine what is causing the problem. 3 Reset Password Use this item to reset the administrator password. -
Page 154: Troubleshooting Process
Troubleshooting process Determine the problem source Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction. Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues: Are supply items within their rated life? ●…
-
Page 155: Power Subsystem
Table 2-7 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued) Does the print-quality meet the customer’s Compare the images with the sample defects in the image defect requirements? tables. See the images defects table in the product service manual. Image quality After the print-quality is acceptable, see step 6. Can the customer print successfully from the Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a valid host computer?
-
Page 156: Control-Panel Checks
Make sure that the formatter is seated and operating correctly. Turn off the product and remove the formatter. Reinstall the formatter, and then verify that the heartbeat LED is blinking. Remove any external accessories or devices, and then try to turn the product on again. NOTE: If the control-panel display is blank, but the main cooling fan runs briefly after the product power is turned on, try printing an engine-test page to determine whether the problem is with the…
-
Page 157
Verifies that all areas respond to a touch Checks calibration Selects a test pattern to view on the display. Tests sounds Shows the firmware version Factory use only Only applicable for models with keyboards Adjusts the backlight Troubleshooting process ENWW… -
Page 158: Control-Panel Diagnostic Flowcharts
Checks the ambient light sensor Tests the home button Control-panel diagnostic flowcharts TIP: To open the diagnostic mode: Tilt the control panel forward. On the back side of the control panel, use a paperclip to press the button inside the small hole near the center of the control panel. Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.
-
Page 159: Touchscreen Black, White, Or Dim (No Image)
Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image) Figure 2-1 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image) Black display White display Dim display (no image) (no backlight (no image) or image) Is the Home button illuminated (bright white)? Is the product in bright Open the sunlight? diagnostic function.
-
Page 160: Touchscreen Is Slow To Respond Or Requires Multiple Presses To
Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond TIP: Use the red-grid touch test to verify that all areas of the touchscreen are correctly functioning. See Control-panel checks on page 124. Figure 2-2 Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond Touchscreen slow to respond or requires multiple presses…
-
Page 161: Touchscreen Has An Unresponsive Zone
Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone Figure 2-3 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone Is the area of the touchscreen you are touching greyed out (intentionally deactivated)? Open the diagnostic function. Perform the red-grid touch test. Does the control panel respond to a touch? Is the same area…
-
Page 162: No Control-Panel Sound
No control-panel sound Figure 2-4 No control-panel sound Control panel has no sound Open the following menus: Administration Display Settings Key Press Sound Select the following: Save Can sounds be heard? Open the diagnostic function. Perform the sound test. Can sounds be heard? Do not replace the control panel.
-
Page 163: Home Button Is Unresponsive
Home button is unresponsive Figure 2-5 Home button is unresponsive Home button unresponsive Open the diagnostic function. Perform the Home button test. Does the virtual LED illuminate green when the Home button is pressed? Turn the product power off, and then on again. Open the diagnostic function.
-
Page 164: Hardware Integration Pocket (Hip) Is Not Functioning (Control Panel Functional)
(control panel functional) Check that all installed hardware integration pocket devices are within HP specifications. The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to the port. If an installed device attempts to draw more power than is provided, the port is automatically disabled.
-
Page 165: Tools For Troubleshooting
NOTE: HP recommends fully troubleshooting the formatter and control panel before replacing either assembly. Use the heartbeat LED to troubleshoot formatter and control panel errors to avoid unnecessarily replacing these assemblies.
-
Page 166: Table 2-8 Heartbeat Led, Status
HP Jetdirect LEDs The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed.
-
Page 167: Engine Diagnostics
For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the product control-panel menus. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
-
Page 168: Figure 2-7 Locating The Engine-Test
Print the engine test pages NOTE: A damaged formatter might interfere with the engine test. If the engine test page does not print, try removing the formatter, and then perform the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is in the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them together.
-
Page 169
Print formatter test pages If the engine test was successful with the formatter removed, reinstall the formatter, and then print a configuration page to test the functionality of the formatter. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. -
Page 170: Paper Path Test
Paper path test This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams. To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path, and then specify the number of copies to print.
-
Page 171: Paper Path Sensor Tests
Paper path sensor tests This test displays the status of each paper-path sensor and allows viewing of sensor status while printing internal pages. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. Open the following menus: Troubleshooting ●…
-
Page 172: Manual Sensor Tests
Manual sensor tests Performs tests to determine whether the paper-path sensors are operating correctly. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. Open the following menus: Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests ● Manual Sensor Test ●…
-
Page 173
Table 2-10 Manual sensor tests (continued) Sensor or switch Sensor Replacement part Replacement part Paper-path sensor Testing of sensor name number number description test name Duplex switchback CF235-67913 Duplexer SR1 Duplexer Remove the duplexer, sensor switchback sensor insert a sheet of paper so that it covers the switchback sensor, and then reinstall the… -
Page 174: Cartridge Door Switch (Sw3)
Cartridge door switch (SW3) Open the cartridge door to activate the sensor. Figure 2-8 Test the cartridge door switch Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, make sure that the sensor-actuator tab on the door is not damaged or missing.
-
Page 175: Left Door Switch (Sw1)
Left door switch (SW1) Open the left door, gently release the door arm and lower the door until it is fully open, and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to activate the switch. Figure 2-9 Test the left door switch Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
-
Page 176: Right Door Sensor (Sr8)
Right door sensor (SR8) Open the right door, and then press the sensor. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, make sure that the sensor-actuator tab on the door is not damaged or missing. If necessary, replace the sensor. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 177: Cartridge Install Sensor (Sr1)
Cartridge install sensor (SR1) Open the cartridge door, remove the print cartridge, and then activate the sensor on the left side of the cartridge cavity. Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If necessary, replace the sensor. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 178: Top (Top-Of-Page) Sensor (Sr9)
TOP (top-of-page) sensor (SR9) Open the cartridge door, and then remove the toner cartridge. Raise the registration shutter. Use a small screwdriver to activate the top sensor. Figure 2-10 Test the top sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the high-voltage power supply (HVPS).
-
Page 179: Fuser Loop Sensor (Sr6)
Fuser loop sensor (SR6) Open the cartridge door, and then remove the toner cartridge. Press the sensor lever to activate the sensor. Figure 2-11 Fuser loop sensor Check the control-panel display for a sensor response. If there is no response, replace the high-voltage power supply (HVPS). Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 180: Fuser Output Sensor (Sr12)
Fuser output sensor (SR12) Open the left door. Pull down the fuser shutter, and then use a small flat-blade screwdriver to pull the sensor lever toward you. Figure 2-12 Fuser output sensor Check the control-panel display for a sensor response. If there is no response, replace the fuser.
-
Page 181: Duplex Switchback Sensor (Sr1)
Duplex switchback sensor (SR1) Remove the duplexer from the product. Insert a sheet of paper in the duplexer until the sheet covers the sensor. Figure 2-13 Duplex switchback sensor Reinstall the duplexer, and then check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the duplexer.
-
Page 182: Duplexer Refeed Sensor (Sr2)
Duplexer refeed sensor (SR2) Remove the duplexer from the product. Insert a sheet of paper in the duplexer until the sheet covers the sensor. Figure 2-14 Duplexer refeed sensor Reinstall the duplexer, and then check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the duplexer.
-
Page 183: Tray 4 Feed Sensor (Sr1)
Tray 4 feed sensor (SR1) Open the lower right door. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to activate the sensor. Figure 2-15 Tray 4 feed sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the paper pickup assembly. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 184: Output Sensor (Sr3)
Output sensor (SR3) Open the left door, and then press the output sensor lever. Figure 2-16 Output sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the paper delivery assembly. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 185: Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Tests
Tray/bin manual sensor tests Use this test to test paper-path sensors and the paper-size switches manually. The following illustrations and table show the locations of these sensors. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
-
Page 186
Table 2-11 Tray/bin manual sensor test (continued) Sensor or switch Sensor Replacement Replacement Paper-path Testing of sensor name number part number part description sensor test name Tray 4 paper- RM1-9415-000CN Tray 4 paper pick- SR3 Tray 4 paper Remove Tray 4, and presence sensor up assembly then push the sensor… -
Page 187: Base Product Trays
Base product trays Tray 1 paper sensor (SR1) Open Tray 1, push the sensor lever down, and hold it for 3 seconds to activate the sensor. Figure 2-17 Tray 1 paper sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the cartridge door assembly. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 188: Figure 2-18 Tray 2 Paper Sensor
Tray 2 Paper sensor (SR7) Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the sensor levers on the right side of the cavity to activate the sensor. Figure 2-18 Tray 2 paper sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the upper cassette pickup assembly.
-
Page 189: Figure 2-19 Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor
Tray 2 paper surface sensor (SR10) Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the sensor at the back of the tray cavity. Figure 2-19 Tray 2 paper surface sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 190: Figure 2-20 Tray 2 Paper Size Switches
Tray 2 paper size switches (SW4, SW6) Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the switches at the back of the tray cavity. Figure 2-20 Tray 2 paper size switches Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 191: Figure 2-21 Tray 3 Paper Sensor
Tray 3 paper sensor (SR5) Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the sensor lever on the right side of the cavity to activate the sensor. Figure 2-21 Tray 3 paper sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the lower cassette pickup assembly.
-
Page 192: Figure 2-22 Tray 3 Paper Surface Sensor
Tray 3 paper surface sensor (SR11) Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the sensor at the back of the tray cavity. Figure 2-22 Tray 3 paper surface sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 193: Figure 2-23 Tray 3 Paper Size Switches
Tray 3 paper size switches (SW5, SW7) Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3, and then push the switches at the back of the tray cavity. Figure 2-23 Tray 3 paper size switches Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 194: Figure 2-24 Output Bin Full Sensor
Output bin full sensor (SR4) Raise and then lower the output-bin levers to activate the sensor. Figure 2-24 Output bin full sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the paper delivery assembly. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 195: Optional 500-Sheet Paper Tray (Tray 4)
Optional 500-sheet paper tray (Tray 4) Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) Remove the Tray 4 cassette, and then push the sensor lever on the right side of the cavity to activate the sensor. Figure 2-25 Tray 4 paper sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the paper pickup assembly.
-
Page 196: Figure 2-26 Tray 4 Paper Surface Sensor
Tray 4 paper surface (SR2) Remove Tray 4, and then press the sensor lever in the back right corner of the tray cavity to activate the sensor. Figure 2-26 Tray 4 paper surface sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly.
-
Page 197: Figure 2-27 Tray 4 Paper Size Switches
Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3) Remove Tray 4, and then push the switches at the back of the tray cavity. Figure 2-27 Tray 4 paper size switches Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the lifter drive assembly. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 198: Figure 2-28 Tray 4 Feed Sensor
Tray 4 Feed sensor (SR1) Open the lower right door. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to activate the sensor. Figure 2-28 Tray 4 feed sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the Tray 4 paper pick-up assembly. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 199: Figure 2-29 Lower Right Door Sensor
Lower right door sensor (SW1) Open the lower right door, and then use a small screwdriver to activate the sensor. Figure 2-29 Lower right door sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the Tray 4 right door sensor. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 200: 1X500 And 3X500 Paper Deck Trays
1×500 and 3×500 paper deck trays Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) on page 163. Tray 4 paper surface sensor (SR2) Tray 4 paper surface (SR2) on page 164. Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3) Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3) on page 165.
-
Page 201: Figure 2-30 Test The Tray 4 Door Switch
Tray 4 door opening/closing door switch (SW1) NOTE: Tray 4, Tray 5, and Tray 6 use the same door switch (SW1). Open and then close the paper-feeder door to ensure that the tab on the door (callout 1) activates the switch (callout 2). Figure 2-30 Test the Tray 4 door switch Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
-
Page 202
Tray 5 paper sensor (SR83) Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) on page 163. Tray 5 paper surface sensor (SR82) Tray 4 paper surface (SR2) on page 164. Tray 5 paper size switches (SW82, SW83) Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3) on page 165. -
Page 203
Tray 6 paper sensor (SR93) Tray 4 paper sensor (SR3) on page 163. Tray 6 paper surface sensor (SR92) Tray 4 paper surface (SR2) on page 164. Tray 6 paper size switches (SW92, SW93) Tray 4 paper size switches (SW2, SW3) on page 165. -
Page 204: Hci Trays
HCI trays NOTE: For the purposes of this section, the tray numbers reflect a base unit with the HCI installed. If your product has an optional 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 4) installed, the tray numbers in this section will differ. In this section, Tray 4 refers to the right tray, and Tray 5 refers to the left tray. Tray 4 paper sensor (PS3103) Remove Tray 4 from the HCI.
-
Page 205: Figure 2-32 Tray 4 Paper Surface Sensor
Tray 4 paper surface sensor (PS3101 and PS3102) Remove Tray 4 from the HCI. In the tray cavity, in the upper right-hand corner, toggle the sensor lever. Figure 2-32 Tray 4 paper surface sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the paper pick-up assembly (right).
-
Page 206: Figure 2-33 Tray 4 Paper Size Sensor
Tray 4 paper size sensor (PS3303) Remove Tray 4 from the HCI. In the tray cavity, press and hold the tray presence switch (callout 1), and then lift the paper size sensor lever (callout 2). Figure 2-33 Tray 4 paper size sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
-
Page 207: Figure 2-34 Tray 4 Paper Feed Sensor
Tray 4 paper feed sensor (PS3302) Remove Tray 4 from the HCI. Place a business card between the feed roller and the separation roller as far as it will go to activate the feed sensor. Figure 2-34 Tray 4 paper feed sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
-
Page 208: Figure 2-35 Tray 4 Door Open Sensor
Tray 4 door open sensor (SW3301) Open the HCI right door. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to activate the door sensor. Figure 2-35 Tray 4 door open sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the crossing paper feed assembly. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 209: Figure 2-36 Tray 5 Paper Sensor
Tray 5 paper sensor (PS3203) Remove Tray 5 from the HCI. In the tray cavity, press and hold the tray presence switch (callout 1), and then lift the paper sensor lever (callout 2). Figure 2-36 Tray 5 paper sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the paper pick-up assembly (left).
-
Page 210: Figure 2-37 Tray Paper Surface Sensor
Tray paper surface sensor (PS3201 and PS3202) Remove Tray 5 from the HCI. At the back of the tray cavity, toggle the sensor lever. Figure 2-37 Tray paper surface sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the paper pick-up assembly (left). Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 211: Figure 2-38 Tray 5 Paper Size Sensor
Tray 5 paper size sensor (PS3304) Remove Tray 5 from the HCI. In the tray cavity, press and hold the tray presence switch (callout 1), and then lift the paper size sensor lever (callout 2). Figure 2-38 Tray 5 paper size sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
-
Page 212: Figure 2-39 Tray 5 Feed Sensor
Tray 5 feed sensor (PS3305) Remove Tray 5 from the HCI. Place a business card between the feed roller and the separation roller as far as it will go to activate the feed sensor. Figure 2-39 Tray 5 feed sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response.
-
Page 213: Scanner Sensor Tests
HCI exit sensor (PS3301) Open the HCI right door. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to lift the sensor lever (callout 2). Figure 2-40 HCI exit sensor Check the control-panel display for sensor response. If there is no response, replace the crossing paper feed assembly. Scanner sensor tests Use these diagnostic tests to manually test the document feeder and scanner sensors.
-
Page 214
Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control-panel display to verify the sensor state (active or inactive). State virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green when the ● sensor is active. Toggle virtual LED next to the sensor number and sensor name illuminates green after the ●… -
Page 215: Print/Stop Test
Print/stop test Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams within the engine. During this test you can stop the paper anywhere along the product paper path. You can program the test to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position.
-
Page 216: Component Tests
Component tests Control-panel tests Open the following menus: Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests ● Available control-panel tests LEDs: test the LEDs on the control panel. ● Display: sequence through display tests. ● Buttons: test the key pad and other buttons. ●…
-
Page 217: Drum Rotation Test Check
Drum rotation test check NOTE: This test is especially important if refilled toner cartridges are in use. The photosensitive drum, which is located in the toner cartridge, must rotate in order for the print process to work. The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the main gear assembly. Use this procedure to determine whether the drum is rotating.
-
Page 218
Table 2-12 Component tests (continued) Component test Item Control-panel display Description message Clutch drive test Feed Roller Clutch Activates the main motor to activate the paper feeder pickup clutch for 10 seconds. Scanner motor test Laser Scanner Motor Activates the laser/scanner motor for 10 seconds. -
Page 219: Diagrams
Diagrams Block diagrams Figure 2-41 Product cross section Item Description Item Description Laser/scanner Duplex re-pickup roller Photosensitive drum Fuser film Toner cartridge Pressure roller Registration roller Duplex reverse roller Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) pickup roller Fuser output roller Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) separation pad Upper cassette (Tray 2) Re-pickup roller Lower cassette (Tray 3)
-
Page 220: Figure 2-42 Optional Paper Feeder (Tray 3 And Tray 4) Cross Section
Item Description Item Description Cassette pickup roller Intermediate output roller Transfer roller Output roller Figure 2-42 Optional paper feeder (Tray 3 and Tray 4) cross section Item Description Pickup roller Feed roller Separation pad Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 221: Table 2-13 1X500-Sheet Paper Deck Cross Section
Figure 2-43 1×500-sheet paper deck cross section Table 2-13 1×500-sheet paper deck cross section Item Description Item Description Pickup roller Storage box Feed roller Cassette Separation roller Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 222: Table 2-14 3X500-Sheet Paper Deck Cross Section
Figure 2-44 3×500-sheet paper deck cross section Table 2-14 3×500-sheet paper deck cross section Item Description Item Description Pickup roller Separation roller Feed roller Cassette Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 223: Table 2-15 3,500-Sheet Hci Cross Section
Figure 2-45 3,500-sheet HCI cross section Table 2-15 3,500-sheet HCI cross section Item Description Item Description Pickup roller Right cassette Feed roller Left cassette Separation roller Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 224: Location Of Connectors
Location of connectors DC controller connections Figure 2-46 DC controller connections Item Description Item Description Item Description LVPS Right door sensor SR8 Paper deck LVPS Output sensor SR3 HVPS Output bin full sensor SR4 Rear fan FM1 Drum motor M1 HVPS Power switch Fuser motor M3…
-
Page 225: Plug/Jack Locations
Item Description Item Description Item Description Duplexer Lower cassette pickup clutch Upper cassette media end switch SW6 Lower cassette media out Lower cassette media end sensor SR5 switch SW7 Plug/jack locations Fax port Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) port (for connecting third-party devices) Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port Host USB port (for connecting third-party devices)
-
Page 226: Locations Of Major Components
Locations of major components Figure 2-47 Base product external components Item Description Item Description Toner-cartridge door Power receptacle Face-down output bin Rear cover Face-down output bin extension tray Test print switch Tray 1 Lower cassette Formatter Upper cassette Right door Front cover Left door Power switch…
-
Page 227: Figure 2-48 1X500-Sheet Paper Feeder External Components
Figure 2-48 1×500-sheet paper feeder external components Item Description Item Description Connector Positioning pins Right door Cassette Lock lever Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 228: Figure 2-49 1X500-Sheet Paper Deck External Components
Figure 2-49 1×500-sheet paper deck external components Item Description Item Description Connector Positioning pins Right door Front door Lock lever Cassette Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 229: Figure 2-50 3X500-Sheet Paper Deck External Components
Figure 2-50 3×500-sheet paper deck external components Item Description Item Description Connector Positioning pins Right door Cassettes Lock lever Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 230: Figure 2-51 3500-Sheet Paper Deck (Hci) External Components
Figure 2-51 3500-sheet paper deck (HCI) external components Item Description Item Description Connector Positioning pins Right door Right cassette Lock lever Left cassette Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 231: Figure 2-52 Duplexer External Components
Figure 2-52 Duplexer external components Item Description Item Description Connector Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 232: Figure 2-53 Stapler/Stacker External Components
Figure 2-53 Stapler/stacker external components Item Description Item Description Jogger guide Output bin extension tray Stapler door Output bin Left door Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 233: Figure 2-54 Major Component Locations (1 Of 3)
Figure 2-54 Major component locations (1 of 3) Item Description Item Description Output assembly Lower cassette pickup assembly Feed assembly Toner-cartridge door assembly Registration assembly Fuser Upper cassette pickup assembly Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 234: Figure 2-55 Major Component Locations (2 Of 3)
Figure 2-55 Major component locations (2 of 3) Item Description Item Description Laser/scanner assembly Lifter drive assembly Main drive assembly Fuser drive assembly Figure 2-56 Major component locations (3 of 3) Item Description Formatter Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 235: Figure 2-57 Pca Component Locations
Figure 2-57 PCA component locations Item Description Item Description Low-voltage power supply High-voltage power supply DC controller Connector PCA Figure 2-58 Motor locations Item Description Item Description Scanner motor Lower cassette lifter motor Drum motor Fuser motor Upper cassette lifter motor Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 236: Figure 2-59 Fan Locations
Figure 2-59 Fan locations Item Description Rear fan Front fan Fuser fan Figure 2-60 Roller locations Item Description Item Description Tray 1 pickup roller Lower cassette pickup roller Tray 1 separation pad Upper cassette pickup roller Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 237: Figure 2-61 Sensor Locations (Base Product)
Item Description Item Description Upper cassette separation roller Transfer roller Lower cassette separation roller Figure 2-61 Sensor locations (base product) Item Description Item Description Output bin media-full sensor Lower cassette lift-up sensor Upper cassette lift-up sensor Cartridge presence sensor TOP sensor Environmental sensor Tray 1 media-out sensor Loop sensor…
-
Page 238: Figure 2-62 Switch Locations (Base Product)
Figure 2-62 Switch locations (base product) Item Description Item Description Left door interlock switch Lower cassette media-width switch Cartridge door-open detection switch Lower cassette media-end switch Test print switch Upper cassette media-end switch Cartridge door interlock switch Power switch Upper cassette media-width switch Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 239: Figure 2-63 Solenoid Location (Base Product)
Figure 2-63 Solenoid location (base product) Item Description Tray 1 pickup solenoid Figure 2-64 Clutch location (base product) Item Description Upper cassette pickup clutch Lower cassette pickup clutch Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 240: Figure 2-65 1X500 Paper Feeder Internal Component Locations
Figure 2-65 1×500 paper feeder internal component locations Item Description Item Description Cassette pickup motor Cassette separation roller Lifter drive assembly Cassette feed roller Controller PCA Cassette pickup roller Cassette pickup assembly Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 241: Figure 2-66 1X500 Paper Deck Internal Component Locations
Figure 2-66 1×500 paper deck internal component locations Item Description Item Description Cassette separation roller Cassette lifter drive assembly Cassette pickup roller Controller PCA Cassette feed roller Cassette pickup assembly Cassette pickup motor Storage box assembly Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 242: Figure 2-67 3X500 Paper Deck Internal Component Locations
Figure 2-67 3×500 paper deck internal component locations Item Description Item Description Cassette separation rollers Lifter drive assemblies Cassette pickup rollers Controller PCAs Cassette feed rollers Cassette pickup assemblies Cassette pickup motors Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 243: Figure 2-68 3500-Sheet Paper Deck (Hci) Internal Component Locations (1 Of 2)
Figure 2-68 3500-sheet paper deck (HCI) internal component locations (1 of 2) Item Description Left cassette pickup assembly Right cassette pickup assembly Controller PCA Merge assembly Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 244: Figure 2-69 3500-Sheet Paper Deck (Hci) Internal Component Locations (2 Of 2)
Figure 2-69 3500-sheet paper deck (HCI) internal component locations (2 of 2) Item Description Item Description Left cassette pickup drive assembly Right cassette lifter drive assembly Left cassette pickup motor Right cassette automatic close assembly Right cassette pickup drive assembly Left cassette automatic close assembly Right cassette pickup motor Left cassette lifter drive assembly…
-
Page 245: Figure 2-70 Stapler/Stacker Internal Component Locations
Figure 2-70 Stapler/stacker internal component locations Item Description Alignment assembly Controller PCA Feed assembly Stapler assembly Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 246: General Timing Charts
General timing charts Figure 2-71 General timing chart Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 247: Circuit Diagrams
Circuit diagrams Figure 2-72 General circuit diagram (1 of 2) 10 9 J1DWH B10 A10 J1DA J1DB +24VD +24VC J903 Tools for troubleshooting ENWW…
-
Page 248: Figure 2-73 General Circuit Diagram (2 Of 2)
Figure 2-73 General circuit diagram (2 of 2) Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 249: Internal Print-Quality Test Pages
Internal print-quality test pages Clean the paper path From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button. Open the following menus: Calibration/Cleaning ● Cleaning Page ● Touch the Print button to print the page. The cleaning process can take several minutes.
-
Page 250: Print A Configuration Page
Print button to print the pages. Figure 2-74 Configuration page Configuration Page Page 1 Device information Installed personalities and options HP Web services Memory Event log Security Paper trays and options Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 251: Hp Embedded Jetdirect Page
HP embedded Jetdirect page The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following information: Always make sure the status line under the general information line indicates «I/O Card Ready.» Figure 2-75 HP embedded Jetdirect page…
-
Page 252: Finding Important Information On The Configuration Pages
“Installed Personalities and All optional devices that are installed on the Options.” Shows model and capacity. product should be listed on the main Embedded HP Jetdirect Look on the main configuration page, configuration page. under “Installed Personalities and In addition, separate pages print for the Options.”…
-
Page 253: Control Panel Menus
You can perform basic product setup by using the Administration menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for more advanced product setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the product IP address or host name in the address bar of a Web browser. Reports menu…
-
Page 254
Table 2-17 Reports menu (continued) First level Second level Values Description Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web Services for the product. View Fax Reports Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received View by this product. -
Page 255: General Settings Menu
General Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the General Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-18 General Settings menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values…
-
Page 256
Table 2-18 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Event Type Wake Select whether to add or edit a Wake Sleep event or a Sleep event, and then select the time and the days for the wake or sleep event. -
Page 257
Table 2-18 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Print Quality Image Registration Adjust Tray <X> Print Test Page Shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and from left to right. -
Page 258
Table 2-18 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description X1 Shift -5.00 mm to 5.00 The direction that is perpendicular to the Y1 Shift way the paper passes through the X2 Shift product is referred to as X. -
Page 259
Table 2-18 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Resistance Mode Normal Use this setting to correct print quality problems in low- humidity Down environments and highly resistive paper. Use the option to solve print quality problems that are related to poor toner-transfer. -
Page 260
Table 2-18 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Economode Toner density Default Lighter print Darker print Jam Recovery Auto* This product provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages. Select one of the following options: Auto: The product attempts to reprint… -
Page 261
Table 2-18 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Manage Stored Jobs Sort Stored Jobs By Name* This option allows you list the jobs Date either Alphabetically or Chronologically. Quick Copy Job Held Off* Sets a maximum Timeout… -
Page 262
Table 2-18 General Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Hold Off Print Job Enabled* Enable this feature if you want to prevent Disabled print jobs from starting while a user is initiating a copy job from the control panel. -
Page 263: Copy Settings Menu
Copy Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Copy Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-19 Copy Settings menu First level Second level Third level Values Description…
-
Page 264
Table 2-19 Copy Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description 2-Sided Format Book-style If you are making two- sided copies, select a 2- Flip-style sided format option. Book-style original; Flip- Book-style: The back side style copy of the original is printed right-side-up, and the Flip-style original;… -
Page 265
Table 2-19 Copy Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description Collate Collate on (Sets in page If you are making more order)* than one copy, select the Collate on (Sets in page Collate off (Pages order) option to assemble grouped) the pages in the correct… -
Page 266
Table 2-19 Copy Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description Image Adjustment Darkness Select a value using the Use to improve the overall slide bar, or touch quality of the copy. Automatic. Adjust the Darkness setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors. -
Page 267
Table 2-19 Copy Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description 2-Sided Format Book-style If you are making two- sided copies, select a 2- Flip-style sided format option. Book-style original; Flip- Book-style: The back side style copy of the original is printed right-side-up, and the Flip-style original;… -
Page 268
Table 2-19 Copy Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description Optimize Text/Picture Manually adjust* Optimize For slider Use this setting to optimize the output for a particular type of content. Text Manually adjust: Use to manually optimize the Printed picture setting for each document. -
Page 269
Table 2-19 Copy Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Values Description Booklet Format Booklet Booklet off Use to copy two or more pages onto one sheet of Booklet on paper so you can fold the sheets in the center to form a booklet. -
Page 270: Scan/Digital Send Settings Menu
To open the product HP Embedded Web Server and set up the email notification server, enter the product IP address into a Web browser. Chapter 2 Solve problems…
-
Page 271
Disable preview options when creating the job, the default options are used. For complete setup, go to the HP Embedded Web Server by typing the IP address of the product into a Web browser. Use the… -
Page 272
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Default File Name The product is shipped with a factory default file name of [Untitled] for any scanned files that are sent or saved. -
Page 273
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Document File Type Select from a list of provides the best file types. overall image and text quality. JPEG is a good choice for most graphics. -
Page 274
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Optimize Text/ Manually adjust* Use to optimize the Picture output for a Text particular type of content. You can Printed picture optimize the output for text, printed Photograph pictures, or a… -
Page 275
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Original Sides 1-sided Use to describe the layout for each side 2-sided of the original document. First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides. -
Page 276
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description 2-Sided Format Book-style Book-style: The back side of the original is Flip-style printed right-side-up, and the back side of the copy is printed the same way. -
Page 277
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Content Orientation Orientation Auto detect For some features to work correctly, you Portrait* must specify the way the content of the Landscape original document is placed on the page. -
Page 278
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Color/Black Automatically Use to enable or detect* disable color scanning. Color Automatically detect: Black/Gray Automatically scans documents in color if Black at least one page has color. -
Page 279
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Notification E-mail E-mail: Select to address receive the notification in an email. Touch the text box following E-mail Address, and then type the email address for the notification. -
Page 280
Table 2-20 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Job Build Job Build off* Use to combine several original Job Build on documents into one job. Also use to scan an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can… -
Page 281
Setup Digital Sending product interacts with Disabled Software (DSS) the HP Digital Server Sending Software (DSS) server. HP DSS handles digital sending tasks, such as faxing, emailing, and sending scanned documents to a network folder or USB storage device. Use the… -
Page 282: Fax Settings Menu
Wizard feature to set up options for faxing. NOTE: To set up LAN fax or Internet fax, use the HP Embedded Web Server. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, type the product network address into a Web browser. To…
-
Page 283
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Redial on No Range: 0 – 2 Answer Default = 0 Redial on Busy Range: 0 – 9 Default = 3 General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature is… -
Page 284
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Billing Codes Enable Billing Codes When billing codes are enabled, a prompt displays that asks the user to enter the billing code for an outgoing fax. This prompt does not appear if the Allow… -
Page 285
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Default Job Options Image Preview Make optional* Use the Image Preview feature to Require preview scan a document and display a Disable preview preview before completing the job. -
Page 286
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe the layout for each side 2-sided of the original document. First select whether the original document is printed on one side or both sides. -
Page 287
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description 2-Sided Format Book-style* Book-style: The back side of the original is Flip-style printed right-side-up, and the back side of the copy is printed the same way. Use this option for originals and copies that are bound along… -
Page 288
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Include Thumbnail When sending an analog fax, select Include Thumbnail receive a thumbnail image of the first page of the fax in your notification. Notification E-mail Provide the email address… -
Page 289
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the overall quality of the copy. Adjust the Darkness setting to increase or decrease the amount of white and black in the colors. -
Page 290
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Optimize Text/ Manually adjust* Optimize For Optimizes the output Picture for a particular type Text of content. You can optimize the output Printed picture for text, printed pictures, or a Photograph… -
Page 291
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Fax Receive Settings Fax Receive Setup Ringer Volume Use to configure settings for receiving Low* faxes. High Rings To Answer Range: 1–6 Default = 1 Fax Receive Speed Fast* Medium… -
Page 292
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Blocked Fax Fax Number to Block The blocked fax list Numbers can contain up to 30 numbers. When the product receives a call from one of the blocked fax numbers, it deletes the incoming fax. -
Page 293
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Default Job Options Notification Do not notify* Configure to receive notification about the Notify when job status of a sent completes document. Notify only if job Do not notify: Turns fails… -
Page 294
Table 2-21 Fax Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Fit to Page Enabled* Use to shrink faxes that are larger than Disabled Letter-size or A4-size so that they can fit onto a Letter-size or A4-size page. -
Page 295: General Print Settings Menu
General Print Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the General Print Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-22 General Print Settings menu First level Second level Values…
-
Page 296
Table 2-22 General Print Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Values Description Form Length Range: 5 – 128 Controls the PCL print-command options. PCL is a set of Default = 60 productcommands that Hewlett- Packard developed to provide access to productfeatures. Use the Form Length feature to… -
Page 297
The following options are available: Standard: Tray numbering is based on newer HP LaserJet models. Classic: Tray numbering is based on HP LaserJet 4 and older models. Tools for troubleshooting ENWW… -
Page 298: Default Print Options Menu
Default Print Options menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Default Print Options menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-23 Default Print Options menu First level Second level Values…
-
Page 299
Table 2-23 Default Print Options menu (continued) First level Second level Values Description 2-Sided Format Book-style* Configures the default style for 2- sided print jobs. If the Book-style Flip-style option is selected, the back side of the page is printed the right way up. -
Page 300: Display Settings Menu
Display Settings menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Display Settings menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-24 Display Settings menu First level Second level Values Description Key Press Sound…
-
Page 301
Table 2-24 Display Settings menu (continued) First level Second level Values Description Clearable Warnings Use this feature to set the period that a clearable warning Job* displays on the control panel. If setting is selected, clearable warnings appear until Clearable Warnings button is pressed. -
Page 302: Manage Supplies Menu
Manage Supplies menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Manage Supplies menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-25 Manage Supplies menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values…
-
Page 303
Table 2-25 Manage Supplies menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Very Low Settings Stop Configure how the product responds Prompt to continue* when the document feeder kit is reaching Continue the end of its estimated life. -
Page 304
Table 2-25 Manage Supplies menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Supply Messages Low Message Use to configure whether a message displays on the control panel when supplies are getting low, but have not yet reached the low threshold. -
Page 305: Manage Trays Menu
Manage Trays menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Manage Trays menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-26 Manage Trays menu First level Values Description Use Requested Tray Exclusively*…
-
Page 306
Table 2-26 Manage Trays menu (continued) First level Values Description Use Another Tray Enabled* Use to turn on or off the control-panel prompt to select another tray when the specified tray Disabled is empty. Two options are available: Enabled: When this option is selected, the user is prompted either to add paper to the selected tray or to choose a different tray. -
Page 307: Network Settings Menu
Jetdirect Menu See the table that follows for details. These menus have the same structure. If an additional HP Jetdirect network card is installed in the EIO slot, then both menus are available. Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu…
-
Page 308
Values Description IPV4 Settings Config Method Bootp Specifies the method that TCP/IPv4 DHCP* parameters will be configured on the Auto IP HP Jetdirect print server. Manual Bootp (Bootstrap Protocol): Use for automatic configuration from a BootP server. DHCP (Dynamic Host… -
Page 309
Auto IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set. Legacy: The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent with older HP Jetdirect products. Primary DNS Range: 0 – 255 Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of Default = a Primary Domain xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System (DNS) Server. -
Page 310
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified Router Specified: The stateful auto- Router Unavailable* configuration method to be used by the Always print server is determined by a router. -
Page 311
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Proxy Server Select from a Specifies the proxy provided list. server to be used by embedded applications in the product. A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access. -
Page 312
Fourth level Values Description Security Secure Web HTTPS Required* For configuration management, specify HTTPS Optional whether the HP Embedded Web Server will accept communications using HTTPS (Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and HTTPS. HTTPS Required: For secure, encrypted communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. -
Page 313
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Reset Security Specify whether the current security settings on the print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults. Yes: Security settings are reset to factory defaults. -
Page 314
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Diagnostics Embedded Tests LAN HW Test Provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems. Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault is internal or external to the product. -
Page 315
Data Path Test This test helps to identify data path and corruption problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation product. It sends a predefined PS file to the product, However, the test is paperless; the file will not print. -
Page 316
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Execution Time [H] Range: 1 – 24 hours Specify the length of time (in hours) that Default = 1 hour an embedded test will be run. If you select zero (0), the test runs indefinitely until an error occurs… -
Page 317
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Timeout Default = 001 Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait for a response from the remote host. The maximum is 100. Default = 004 Count Specify the number of ping test packets… -
Page 318
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description RTT Min Default = 0000 Shows the minimum detected roundtrip- time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. RTT Max Default = 0000 Shows the maximum detected roundtrip- time (RTT), from 0 to… -
Page 319
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Link Speed Auto* The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network. The available settings depend on the product and installed print server. -
Page 320
Table 2-28 Jetdirect Menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description 100TX Full Limits auto- negotiation to a maximum link speed of 100 Mbps. 100TX Auto 1000 Mbps, full- duplex operation. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW… -
Page 321: Troubleshooting Menu
Troubleshooting menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Troubleshooting menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-29 Troubleshooting menu First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description…
-
Page 322
Table 2-29 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Used by a technician to evaluate and Diagnostic diagnose fax issues by listening to the sounds of fax modulations. Fax Log Entries The standard fax log includes basic Off*… -
Page 323
Table 2-29 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Number of Copies Range: 1–500 Sets the default number of copies for Default = 1 a copy job. This default applies when the Copy or Quick Copy function is initiated from the product Home… -
Page 324
Table 2-29 Troubleshooting menu (continued) First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description Component Test Select from a list of Use to exercise available individual parts components. independently to isolate noise, leaking, or other issues. To start the test, select one of the components. -
Page 325: Device Maintenance Menu
Device Maintenance menu Backup/Restore menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the Backup/Restore menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-30 Backup/Restore menu First level Second level Third level Values…
-
Page 326: Calibration/Cleaning Menu
Calibration/Cleaning menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibration/Cleaning menu. In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting. Table 2-31 Calibration/Cleaning menu First level Second level Values Description Cleaning Settings Auto Cleaning…
-
Page 327: Usb Firmware Upgrade Menu
USB Firmware Upgrade menu To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the USB Firmware Upgrade menu. Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and then follow the on- screen instructions.
-
Page 328: Interpret Control-Panel Messages
Interpret control-panel messages Control-panel message types The control-panel messages and event code errors indicate the current product status or situations that might require action. NOTE: Event log errors may or may not appear on the control-panel display. Access the event log to view or print the event log errors.
-
Page 329: D1 Jam In Upper Left Door
13.80.D1 Jam in upper left door Description Input delay jam. Paper did not arrive at the jam inlet sensor (SR2100). Recommended action Open the upper left door Remove all paper found. Close the upper left door. If the error persists, replace the stapler/stacker paper feed assembly. 13.80.FF Jam in upper left door Description Input initial jam.
-
Page 330: Jam In Stapler
Recommended action Remove all paper from the stacker bin area. Open the upper left door. Remove all paper found. Lower the stacker bin if it is in up position, and then close the upper left door. If the error persists, replace the stapler/stacker alignment assembly. 13.89.31 Jam in Stapler Description Staple jam.
-
Page 331: A4.D4 Jam In Tray 4
Use the Components tests to toggle the Tray 4 solenoid (listen for the solenoid to move). If the solenoid is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 4 paper pickup assembly. Use the Components tests to activate the Tray 4 pickup motor (listen for the motor to rotate). If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 4 pickup motor.
-
Page 332: A4.D5 Jam In Middle Right Door
Recommended action 3×500 paper deck installed. Open the lower right door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the lower right door. Inspect the Tray 5 pick, feed and separation rollers. Clean or replace them if necessary. Check the connectors at the feed sensor, solenoid, feed motor, and the controller PCA. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 5 feed sensor.
-
Page 333: A4.D6 Jam In Lower Right Door
13.A4.D6 Jam in lower right door Description This jam occurs when the leading edge of the sheet exits the source tray, but does not reach the Tray 4 feed sensor (SR1PD) in the designated amount of time. Recommended action 3×500 paper deck installed. Open the lower right door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the lower right door.
-
Page 334: A4.Ff Jam In Tray 4 Or 13.A4.Ff Jam In Lower Right Door Or 13.A4.Ff Jam In Middle Right Door
Use the Components tests to activate the Tray 6 pickup motor (listen for the motor to rotate). If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 pickup motor. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 4 feed sensor. If the sensor or lever are not properly functioning, replace the HCI paper pickup assembly.
-
Page 335: A5.D6 Jam In Lower Right Door
Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 5 feed sensor and HCI exit media feed sensor (PS3301). If the Tray 5 feed sensor or lever are not properly functioning, replace the Tray 5 paper pickup assembly. If the HCI media feed sensor is not properly functioning, replace the HCI crossing paper feed assembly.
-
Page 336: A6.D6 Jam In Tray 6
Recommended action Open the appropriate door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the door. Check for jammed paper in Tray 5 and the HCI right tray inner flap. Inspect the connectors at the feed sensor and controller PCA for Tray 5. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 5 feed sensor and HCI exit media feed sensor (PS3301).
-
Page 337: A7.D5 Jam In Lower Right Door
Recommended action Open Tray 5 and the inner flap, remove any jammed paper, and then close Tray 5 and the inner flap. Inspect the connectors at the feed sensor and controller PCA for Tray 6. Use the Tray/bin manual sensor tests to toggle the Tray 6 feed sensor. If the Tray 6 feed sensor or lever are not properly functioning, replace the Tray 6 paper pickup assembly.
-
Page 338: A7.D6 Jam Tray 5 (Inner Flap)
13.A7.D6 Jam tray 5 (inner flap) Description This jam occurs when the leading edge passes the tray 6 feed sensor (PS3305), but does not reach the HCI exit sensor (PS3301) in the designated amount of time. Recommended action 1×500 paper feeder and HCI installed. Open Tray 5 and the inner flap, remove any jammed paper, and then close Tray 5 and the inner flap.
-
Page 339: Ab.ee Door Open Jam
Lower right cover 2 open; AC ◦ Lower right cover 3 open; AD ◦ Recommended action Close the upper right door. Check the tab of the upper right door that engages the right door sensor. If it is damaged, replace the right door assembly.
-
Page 340: Ad.ee Door Open Jam
Recommended action Close the lower right door or HCI inner flap. Depending on input tray configuration, check the tab of the HCI lower right door that engages the door sensor (SW3301). If it is damaged, replace the door assembly. Check the HCI inner flap door (above right HCI tray) to verify that it properly opens and closes. Use the Manual sensor tests menu to toggle the lower right door (Tray 4/5) sensors.
-
Page 341: B2.Ax Jam In Top Cover Area
Make sure that the transfer roller is seated properly and not worn or deformed. Replace the transfer roller if necessary. Make sure that the registration assembly shutter is properly functioning. Replace the registration assembly if necessary. Check the toner cartridge for damage. Replace the cartridge if necessary. Use the Manual sensor tests to toggle the TOP sensor (SR9).
-
Page 342: B2.D1 Jam In Tray 1
Check the toner cartridge for damage. Replace the cartridge if necessary. Use the Manual sensor tests to toggle the TOP sensor (SR9). If the sensor is not properly functioning, replace the high-voltage power supply. Inspect the connector (J62) on the DC controller PCA, and connector (J901) on the high-voltage power supply.
-
Page 343: B2.D3 Jam In Top Cover Area (Tray 3) (No Optional Input Devices Installed)
Recommended action Open the top cover, remove any jammed paper, and then close the top cover. IMPORTANT: Do not remove the toner cartridge. Make sure that you remove any jammed paper from the top cover area before proceeding to avoid tearing partially picked paper. Open Tray 2, remove any jammed paper, and then close Tray 2 and the top cover.
-
Page 344: B2.D3 Jam In Top Cover Area (Tray 3) (Optional Input Devices Installed)
Use the Manual sensor tests to toggle the TOP sensor (SR9). If the sensor is not properly functioning, replace the high-voltage power supply. Inspect the connector (J48) on the DC controller PCA, and connector (J63) on the Tray 3 lower clutch.
-
Page 345: B2.Dx Jam In Top Cover Area
Recommended action Open the top cover, remove any jammed paper, and then close the top cover. NOTE: Do not remove the toner cartridge. Make sure that the duplexer is seated properly and check for obstructions in the paper path. Use the Components tests to activate the duplex feed motor (listen for the motor to rotate). If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the duplexer.
-
Page 346: B2.Ff Jam In Top Cover Area
Make sure that the registration assembly shutter is properly functioning. Replace the registration assembly if necessary. Use the Components tests to activate the pickup motor and the pickup solenoid/clutch (listen for the motor/solenoid to rotate/move) for the source tray. If the motor or solenoid are not properly functioning, replace the motor or solenoid.
-
Page 347: B9.Ax Fuser Area Jam
13.B9.AX Fuser area jam Description Fuser or duplexer stay jam. This jam occurs when the engine detects a paper stay jam at the fuser output sensor (SR12). Most likely there is an accordion jam in the fuser exit path. X indicates the fuser mode 2 = Normal ◦…
-
Page 348: B9.Dd Fuser Area Jam (Top Cover)
D = Envelope 1 ◦ D = Envelope 2 ◦ Recommended action Remove the duplexer (if installed). Remove the left door, and then remove the fuser. Remove any jammed paper from the fuser, and then reinstall the fuser. NOTE: Remove any other jammed paper from the fuser area. Reinstall the left door, and duplexer (if removed).
-
Page 349: B9.Ff Jam In Left Door
DC controller, J6 and J47 ● High-voltage power supply, J902 ● Use the Components tests to activate the duplex feed motor (listen for the motor to rotate). If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the duplexer. 13.B9.FF Jam in left door Description Fuser exit sensor (SR12) residual jam.
-
Page 350: D1.Ff Jam In Left Door
X indicates the fuser mode 2 = Normal ◦ 3 = Light media 1 ◦ 3 = Light media 2 ◦ 4 = Heavy media 1 ◦ 5 = Heavy media 2 ◦ B = Transparency ◦ D = Envelope 1 ◦…
-
Page 351: D3.Dx Jam In Duplexer
Recommended action Open the top cover, remove any jammed paper, and then close the top cover. 13.D3.DX Jam in duplexer Description Late to duplex exit jam. This jam occurs when the leading edge of the paper reaches the duplex switchback sensor (SR1DU), but fails to reach the duplex reefed sensor (SR2DU). The leading edge is in the duplexer, but the trailing edge might be accessible from the left door.
-
Page 352: De.ee Jam In Duplexer (During A Print Job)
Recommended action Open the top cover, remove any jammed paper, and then close the top cover. Remove the duplexer, remove any jammed paper, and then reinstall the duplexer. NOTE: Make sure that the duplexer is fully seated when reinstalled. Use the Manual sensor tests to toggle the duplexer refeed sensor (SR2DU). If the sensor or lever are not properly functioning, replace the duplexer.
-
Page 353: E1.Ff Jam In Left Door
13.E1.FF Jam in left door Description Power on residual paper jam. This jam occurs when paper exists at any of the paper path jam sensors when the product power is turned on or after jam re-evaluation. Recommended action Open the left door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the left door. Inspect the connectors on the paper delivery assembly.
-
Page 354: E6.Bd Jam In Left Door
13.E6.BD Jam in left door Description Multi-feed from duplexer jam. This jam occurs when the engine detects a multi-feed in the output path from the duplexer. Recommended action Check the paper path and rollers at the fuser and the duplexer for damage or wear. Replace the fuser or duplexer if necessary.
-
Page 355: E6.Ff
5 = Heavy media 2 ◦ B = Transparency ◦ D = Envelope 1 ◦ D = Envelope 2 ◦ Recommended action Open the left door, remove any jammed paper, and then close the left door. Inspect the connector (J55) on the output assembly, and the connector (J45) on the DC controller PCA.
-
Page 356: Ff.ff
13.FF.FF Description Power on residual paper jam; multiple sensors. This jam occurs when paper exists at any of the paper path jam sensors when the product power is turned on or after jam re-evaluation. Recommended action Multiple sensors are blocked. See the steps for other 13.XX.FF errors to clear this error. 13.WX.YZ Fuser area jam (top cover) Description Fuser delay jam from Tray 1-6.
-
Page 357: Insufficient Memory: To Continue, Touch «Ok
DC controller, J6 and J47 ● High-voltage power supply, J902 ● Use the Components tests to activate the fuser drive motor (listen for the motor to rotate). If the motor is not properly functioning, replace the fuser. 20.00.00 Insufficient memory: <Device> To continue, touch “OK” Description The product has experienced a memory error.
-
Page 358
30.01.08 Description The flatbed optical assembly cannot find the origin notch. Recommended action This is an informational message, and no action is required. If the flatbed optical assembly cannot find the origin notch on the flatbed scanner, the scanned image might be offset on the copied page. The image displacement will be less then 1 mm or pixel off. -
Page 359
30.01.44 Description A scanner firmware error has occurred. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. Upgrade the firmware. Replace the scanner control board. Replace the formatter. 30.01.45 Description General code assert error for the copy processor board firmware. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. -
Page 360
Recommended action This is an informational message, and no action is required. 30.03.20 Description The copy processor board firmware cannot communicate with the PCA on the optical assembly. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. Verify the FFC cables between scanner and scanner control board are connected. Replace the scanner. -
Page 361
30.03.30 Description The scanner control board cannot communicate with the flatbed scanner motor. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on. As the product turns on, verify the scan head moves. Verify the drive belt is in the correct position. Check for a red LED illuminated on the scanner motor. -
Page 362
Recommended action Verify the paper meets the product specifications. Make sure the input tray is not overloaded. Check the event log for document feeder errors, and resolve any errors first. Open and close the top cover to see if the pick motor turns without posting this error. If the motor turns, then the motor is good. -
Page 363
31.08.A1 Description An initialization occurred after an abnormal product shutdown. Recommended action No action necessary. 31.08.A2 Description A normal shutdown has occurred. Recommended action No action necessary. 31.08.A3 Description A normal initialization has occurred. Recommended action No action necessary. 31.13.01 Description Paper pick was initiated, but the page didn’t make it to the pick success sensor. -
Page 364
Clean the document feeder roller. Open the following menus: Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests ● Scanner Tests ● Actuate the Pick-success Sensor. If the sensor does not show functionality when tested, replace the Document feeder. 31.13.02 Description The paper passed the pick success sensor and then jammed in the document feeder paper path. Recommended action Clear the paper path and try feeding the page again. -
Page 365
Verify the flag is not broken off. Open the following menus: Administration ● Troubleshooting ● Diagnostic Tests ● Scanner Tests ● Actuate the ADF Jam Cover Sensor. If the sensor does not show functionality when tested, replace the document feeder. 31.13.14 Description This is a feed jam in the document feeder, and the motor is not turning. -
Page 366: C.xx
Backup is from newer version of firmware than what is currently on the product. 32.1C.0C (event code) ◦ Backup canceled from the HP Embedded Web Server. 32.1C.0D (event code) ◦ Backup/restore failed, auto-reboot failed, or the product might be busy.
-
Page 367
32.1C.11 (event code) ◦ Backup/restore time-out while communicating with the engine. 32.1C.12 (event code) ◦ Backup/restore time-out while communicating with the disk. 32.1C.13 (event code) ◦ Scheduled backup failure. 32.1C.14 (event code) ◦ NVRAM restore time-out while communicating with the formatter. 32.1C.17 (event code) ◦… -
Page 368
32.1C.23 (event code) ◦ Failed to restore address book subsystem. 32.1C.24 (event code) ◦ NVRAM backup/restore successful. 32.1C.25 (event code) ◦ Copy subsystem reset failed. 32.1C.26 (event code) ◦ Fax subsystem reset failed. 32.1C.27 (event code) ◦ Digital Send subsystem reset failed. 32.1C.28 (event code) ◦… -
Page 369
No action necessary 32.1C.06 (event code) ◦ Retry 32.1C.07 (event code) ◦ Retry 32.1C.08 (event code) ◦ Remove stored jobs and retry Use larger capacity storage device Check network share 32.1C.09 (event code) ◦ Use a valid backup file 32.1C.0A (event code) ◦… -
Page 370
Turn the product off, and then on and retry 32.1C.17 (event code) ◦ Turn the product off, and then on and retry 32.1C.1B (event code) ◦ Turn the product off, and then on and retry 32.1C.1C (event code) ◦ Turn the product off, and then on and retry 32.1C.21 (event code) ◦… -
Page 371
Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on and retry. If the error persists, clear the firmware image from the active partition by using the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 33.01.01 Description Read back data from ICB and pass to SR clients so that they can recover occurred Information. Recommended action This is an informational message, and no action is required. -
Page 372
Recommended action This is an informational message, and no action is required. 33.02.01 Description A used part with data was replaced in the device. Used board/disk installed. Recommended action Turn the product power off, and then on again. If the error persists, please escalate this problem to your Global Business unit. 33.02.02 Description A Save/Recover status error has occurred on the product and one, or both, of the Save/Recover… -
Page 373: Wx.yz Used Board/Disk Installed
Some data might be lost. Check the host configuration. 40.00.02 Embedded I/O buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” Description Too much data was sent to the embedded HP Jetdirect print server. An incorrect communications protocol might be in use. Recommended action Press the button to print the transferred data.
-
Page 374: Eio Buffer Overflow To Continue, Touch «Ok
40.00.03 EIO <X> buffer overflow To continue, touch “OK” Description The product displays this message when the EIO card in the indicated slot has overflowed its I/O buffer during a busy state. Recommended action Press the button to continue. 40.00.04 EIO <X> bad transmission To continue, touch “OK” Description The product displays this message when a connection with the card in the indicated slot has been abnormally broken.
-
Page 375: Yz Unexpected Size In Tray
41.03.YZ Unexpected size in Tray <X> Description The product detected a different paper size than expected. Y = Size mismatch, Z = Source Y = 0: Detected paper is longer or shorter than expected ◦ Y = A: Detected paper too long ◦…
-
Page 376: Yz Unexpected Type In Tray
41.05.YZ Unexpected type in Tray <X> Description The product detected a different paper type than expected. Y = Expected type, Z = Detected type Y = 0: Unknown ◦ Y = 1: Normal paper ◦ Y = 3: LBP transparency ◦…
-
Page 377: Yz Unexpected Type In Tray To Use Another Tray, Touch «Options
Recommended action Load the tray with the size and type of paper indicated, or use another tray if available. If this message appears and the tray is loaded with the correct paper type, check the print driver settings to make sure that they match the tray type settings. Clean the paper sensor.
-
Page 378: Wx.yz Error To Use Another Tray, Touch «Options
Z = 9: Rough paper ◦ Z = A: Extra heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 3) ◦ Z = B: Heavy glossy paper (glossy paper 2) ◦ Z = C: Heavy paper 3 ◦ Z = D: Heavy paper 2 ◦…
-
Page 379: 347
5: Heavy paper 2, typed or Auto sense ◦ 6: Heavy paper 3, typed or Auto sense ◦ 7: Glossy paper 1, typed or Auto sense ◦ 8: Glossy paper 2, typed or Auto sense ◦ 9: Glossy paper 3, typed or Auto sense ◦…
-
Page 380: 348
Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Re-send the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.01.XX Description Image transformer internal error. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Re-send the print job. item in the Preboot menu.
-
Page 381: 349
47.05.00 Description Print spooler framework internal error. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Re-send the print job. If the error persists, execute the Partial Clean item in the Preboot menu. 47.06.XX Description Print app internal error. Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again.
-
Page 382: Wx.yz Fuser Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
50.WX.YZ Fuser error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced a fuser error. W = fuser error code ◦ X = fuser mode ◦ 0: Photo paper 1, 2, 3, Designated paper 2, 3, or NA, typed or Auto-sense ●…
-
Page 383
6: Deep sleep ● F: Off ● Recommended action W = A: High fuser temperature 2 Remove and then reseat the fuser. Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser. Make sure the product is not located in front of a vent or window where cool air may interfere with the ability of the fuser to heat up. -
Page 384
W = 3, High fuser temperature 1 Remove and then reseat the fuser. Check the paper type setting using the product menus and in the product driver. Make sure that they match and are correct for the type of paper being used. If this product was previously serviced, check the connector (J61) on the DC controller PCA. -
Page 385: Yy Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
W = 9, High fuser temperature 2 Remove and then reseat the fuser. Make sure there is no residual paper in the fuser. Make sure the product is not located in front of a vent or window where cool air may interfere with the ability of the fuser to heat up.
-
Page 386: Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
52.00.00 Error To continue turn off then on Description A scanner rotation error has occurred. Recommended action Turn the product off and then on. Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu. If the component tests showed a failure, reconnect the connectors of the scanner motor (J1900 and J801) and the DC controller PCA (J71).
-
Page 387: Xx.yy Error
XX = 05 Perform the laser scanner component tests in the Troubleshooting menu. Check the connectors (J1900 and J801) on the laser scanner driver PCA and the connector (J71) on the DC controller PCA. If the error persists, replace the laser scanner. 54.XX.YY Error Description A sensor error has occurred.
-
Page 388: Yy Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
56.00.YY Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced a communication error with the optional paper tray. 56.00.01 (event code): Illegal input, selected paper input tray is unavailable ◦ 56.00.02 (event code): Illegal output, selected paper output bin is unavailable ◦…
-
Page 389: Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
Recommended action Turn the product off and then on. Verify that the connector (J63) on the DC controller PCA and the sensor (J400) are connected correctly and undamaged. If the error persists, replace environmental sensor. 58.00.04 Error To continue turn off then on Description The low-voltage power supply is defective.
-
Page 390: Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
Reconnect the connector (J47) on the DC controller PCA. Replace the fuser motor. 59.00.40 Error To continue turn off then on Description A fuser motor rotational error has occurred. Recommended action Turn the product off and then on. Perform the fuser motor component test in the Troubleshooting menu.
-
Page 391: Tray Lifting Error
60.00.0Y Tray <Y> lifting error Description The indicated tray has not lifted into the paper feed position. Recommended action 60.00.02 Media input Tray 2 lift-up motor (M4) failure Use the Tray 2 paper surface sensor (SR10) test in the Tray/Bin manual sensor test to verify that the sensor is properly functioning.
-
Page 392: Media Input Source Pickup Mechanism Malfunction
TIP: Check the connector (J2006) on the paper feeder controller PCA associated with the tray. If the error persists, replace the cassette tray. 60.00.05 or 60.00.06 Media input Tray 5 lift-up motor (M82) failure or media input Tray 6 lift-up motor (M92) failure NOTE: The Tray 5 and Tray 6 motors, sensors, and connectors numbers depend on the input device configuration.
-
Page 393: No System To Continue Turn Off Then On
Recommended action Turn the product off, and then on again. Use the paper pick-up motor (M1, M4, M5, M92, M3301, M3304) test in the Component test verify that the pickup motor is properly functioning. If the pickup motor is not functioning, replace the paper pick-up assembly.
-
Page 394: Output Accessory Failure To Continue Turn Off Then On
Turn the power on. If the error persists, replace the stapler assembly. 66.80.19 Output accessory failure To continue turn off then on Description Self-priming malfunction. Not able to complete self-priming after 11 attempts. Recommended action Turn the power off. Make sure that the external paper handling accessory is clear of all packing materials and other obstructions.
-
Page 395: X.yy Embedded Jetdirect Error
Recommended action Turn the product off and then on. If the error persists, replace the DC controller. 80.0X.YY Embedded Jetdirect Error Description Embedded HP JetDirect print server critical error. 80.01.80 (event code) ◦ No heartbeat 80.01.81 (event code) ◦ Reclaim time-out 80.01.82 (event code)
-
Page 396: Wx.00 Wireless Network Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
80.03.08 (event code) ◦ Invalid identify response 80.03.09 (event code) ◦ Invalid channel map return status 80.03.10 (event code) ◦ Invalid reclaim return status 80.03.12 (event code) ◦ Datagram invalid buffer 80.03.13 (event code) ◦ Max stream channels 80.03.14 (event code) ◦…
-
Page 397: Wx.yz Embedded Jetdirect Error To Continue Turn Off Then On
If the error persists, replace the wireless network component. 81.WX.YZ Embedded JetDirect Error To continue turn off then on Description The product experienced an embedded HP Jetdirect print server critical error. 81.01.00 (event code): EIO Networking Event <UVWXYZ> ◦ 81.02.00 (event code): Wireless Networking Event <UVWXYZ>…
-
Page 398: Corrupt Data In X Volume
98.00.0X Corrupt data in X volume Description Data corruption has occurred in the firmware volume. 98.00.01 Corrupt data in firmware volume Reinstall firmware ◦ 98.00.02 Corrupt data in solutions volume Re-install accessory solutions ◦ 98.00.03 Corrupt data in configuration volume Re-configure the product ◦…
-
Page 399: Upgrade Not Performed Error Writing To Disk
99.00.03 Upgrade not performed error writing to disk Description Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not performed. An error occurred when writing to the hard disk. Recommended action Download the firmware again, and then attempt the upgrade again. If the error persists, perform the clean disk/format disk process. Download the firmware from the Preboot menu, and then attempt the upgrade again.
-
Page 400: Upgrade Not Performed Error Reading Upgrade
99.00.07 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Unexpected read error when reading rest of header. Recommended action Download the RFU file and attempt the upgrade again. If the error persists, replace the hard disk. 99.00.08 Upgrade not performed error reading upgrade Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed.
-
Page 401: Upgrade Not Performed The File Is Invalid
Job canceled when reading rest of header. Recommended action Re-send the RFU. 99.00.12 Upgrade not performed the file is invalid Description A remote firmware upgrade (RFU) was not performed. Header number is 1 but header size doesn’t match version 1 size. Recommended action Download the RFU file again.
-
Page 402: 370
Download the correct firmware file from www.hp.com/go/ljMFPM725_firmware, and then re-send the firmware upgrade. 99.00.27 only: Turn the product off, and then on again. Re-send the firmware upgrade. If the error persists, try the sending the upgrade by another method (USB or HP Embedded Web Server). 99.01.XX Description 99.01.00…
-
Page 403: Unsupported Disk
Recommended action No action necessary. 99.02.09 Description Firmware upgrade cancelled by user. Recommended action No action necessary. 99.09.60 Unsupported disk Description Preboot menu error. The hard disk currently installed is not recognized or supported by the product. Recommended action Install the correct hard disk for this product. 99.09.61 Unsupported disk Description Preboot menu error.
-
Page 404: Incorrect Disk
99.09.63 Incorrect disk Description A new or blank disk has been installed in a device which previously had an encrypted disk. Recommended action Follow the procedure to load firmware on a new hard disk, and then lock it to this product. 99.09.64 Disk malfunction Description A fatal hard disk failure has occurred.
-
Page 405: Xx.yy
Select the Administration menu. NOTE: If there is a password assigned to the Administrator, a prompt to enter the password displays. Select the Download item. The user can now download a new firmware bundle to the product. 99.09.68 Description The secondary encrypted disk has been removed from this device. Recommended action Reinstall the secondary encrypted storage device.
-
Page 406: Black Cartridge Low
Actual supply life remaining may vary. Consider having a replacement available. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. Once an HP supply has reached the very low condition, HP’s warranty on that supply has ended.
-
Page 407: Card Slot File Operation Failed To Clear Touch «Clear
Card slot not initialized To clear touch “Clear” Description This file-storage component must be initialized before use. Recommended action Use the embedded Web server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the component. Cartridge ship mode Description Manufacturing use only — should not be seen in field.
-
Page 408: Cleaning Disk % Complete Do Not Power Off
Recommended action Print the job by using a product driver for a different print language, or add the requested language to the product (if possible). To see a list of available personalities, print a configuration page. Cleaning disk <X>% complete Do not power off Description A storage device is being sanitized or cleaned.
-
Page 409: Data Received
Recommended action Close the cartridge door. Make sure that the connectors are fully seated on the cartridge door switch SW3. Make sure that the tab on the cartridge door that activates the switch is not missing or damaged. Replace the cartridge-door assembly if necessary. Replace the door switch.
-
Page 410: Eio Disk Spinning Up
Recommended action Turn the product off. Remove the EIO disk from the slot indicated. Install a new EIO disk. Turn the product on. EIO <X> disk spinning up Description The EIO disk product in the indicated slot is spinning up. Jobs that require disk access must wait. X = 1: Slot 1 ◦…
-
Page 411: Eio Is Write Protected To Clear Touch «Clear
EIO not initialized To clear touch “Clear” Description This file-storage component must be initialized before use. Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system. Event log is empty Description No product events are in the log.
-
Page 412: Fuser Kit Very Low To Continue, Touch «Ok
Fuser Kit very low To continue, touch “OK” Description The product indicates when a supply level is very low. NOTE: After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP Premium Protection Warranty for that supply has ended. Recommended action Replace the fuser kit.
-
Page 413: Install Black Cartridge
Recommended action No action is necessary. Wait until the Ready message appears on the display. Install Black Cartridge Description A supply is either not installed or not correctly installed in the product. Recommended action Replace or reinstall the toner cartridge correctly to continue printing. Install Fuser Unit Description The fuser is either not installed or not correctly installed in the product.
-
Page 414: Internal Disk File Operation Failed To Clear Touch «Clear
Internal disk file operation failed To clear touch “Clear” Description A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation. Recommended action Press the Clear button to clear the message. Internal disk file system is full To clear touch “Clear” Description A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full.
-
Page 415: Internal Disk Spinning Up
Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system. Internal disk spinning up Description Internal disk device is spinning up its platter. Jobs that require disk access must wait. Recommended action No action is necessary.
-
Page 416: Load Tray : [Size] To Continue, Touch «Ok
Make sure that the sensor flag on the paper presence sensor is not damaged and moves freely. Reconnect the corresponding connector: Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): Connectors (J1) on the Tray 1 paper out sensor and the connector ● (J41) on the DC controller PCA. Input trays: Connectors (J15 and J7) on the tray paper out sensor and the connectors (J43, ●…
-
Page 417: Load Tray : [Type], [Size] To Use Another Tray, Touch «Options
Recommended action Load the tray with the requested paper or adjust the paper guides. If the error persists, use the tray paper present sensor test in the Tray/Bin Manual Sensor Test to verify that the sensor is correctly functioning. Make sure that the sensor flag on the paper presence sensor is not damaged and moves freely. Reconnect the corresponding connector: Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): Connector (J1) on the Tray 1 paper out sensor and the connector ●…
-
Page 418: Manually Feed: [Size]
Recommended action The even-numbered pages of the two-sided document have printed. Follow the next steps to print the odd-numbered pages. Maintaining the same orientation, remove the document from the output bin. Do not discard blank pages. Flip the document over so the printed side is up. Load document in Tray 1.
-
Page 419: Manually Feed: [Type], [Size] To Continue, Touch «Ok
Manually feed: [Type], [Size] To continue, touch “OK” Description This message appears when manual feed is selected, Tray 1 is not loaded, and other trays are available. Recommended action Load tray with requested paper. ◦ If paper is already in tray, press the Help button to exit the message and then press the button…
-
Page 420: Output Bin Full
Description This is a test mode used in manufacturing and should not be seen on a normally operating product. Recommended action Contact HP support for steps to resolve this condition. Printing Engine Test… Description The product is printing an engine test page.
-
Page 421: Ram Disk Device Failure To Clear Touch «Clear
Description The RAM disk file system must be initialized before it can be used. Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system. Remove cartridge lock Description The product has been turned on with a cartridge shipping lock installed on the toner cartridge.
-
Page 422: Remove The Toner Cartridge
The fuser kit does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: After the fuser kit reaches its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection Warranty on that fuser kit ends. Recommended action Replace the fuser kit.
-
Page 423: Replace Supplies
The actual life remaining might be different than estimated. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. HP recommends that the customer have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable.
-
Page 424: Rom Disk Is Write Protected To Clear Touch «Clear
Description The ROM disk file system must be initialized before it can be used. Recommended action Use the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the file system. Size mismatch in Tray <X> Description The paper in the listed tray does not match the size specified for that tray.
-
Page 425: Supplies Low
Multiple supplies on the product have reached the low threshold. Recommended action Replace the supply when print quality is no longer acceptable. NOTE: When an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, the HP Premium Protection Warranty ends. Supplies very low To continue, touch “OK” Description More than one color supply on the product has reached the very low condition.
-
Page 426: Tray Empty: [Type], [Size]
NOTE: This could be a false message. If the tray is loaded without removing the shipping lock, the product does not sense that the paper is loaded. Remove the shipping lock, and then load the tray. Tray <X> empty: [Type], [Size] Description The specified tray is empty and needs to be loaded, but the current job does not need this tray to print.
-
Page 427: Type Mismatch Tray
NOTE: If this message appears after lifter drive assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that the connector on the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated. Type mismatch Tray <X> Description The specified tray contains a paper type that does not match the configured type. Recommended action The specified tray will not be used until this condition is addressed.
-
Page 428: Unsupported Drive Installed
Unsupported supply installed To continue, touch “OK” Description One or more genuine HP supplies designed for a different product are installed. These supplies are not supported by the product. The product may either shut down or slow down. Recommended action The installed supply was not designed for this product and is not supported.
-
Page 429: Unsupported Usb Accessory Detected Remove Usb Accessory
Recommended action Turn product off and remove the excess tray accessories. Turn the product on. Unsupported USB accessory detected Remove USB accessory Description A non-supported USB accessory has been installed. Recommended action Turn the product off, remove the USB accessory, and then turn the product on. Upgrade complete To continue turn off then on Description The firmware upgrade is complete.
-
Page 430: Usb Is Write Protected To Clear Touch «Clear
Description The USB device file system must be initialized before it can be used. Recommended action Use the embedded Web server or HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the component. USB storage accessory removed Clearing any associated data Description This message displays for six seconds after removal of the USB storage accessory.
-
Page 431: Usb Storage File System Is Full To Clear Touch «Clear
Used supply installed To continue, touch “OK” Description The product displays this message when a used supply (a remanufactured or refilled genuine HP or non-HP product) has been installed. 10.00.34 (event code): Black toner cartridge ◦…
-
Page 432: Event Log Messages
Event log messages Some messages appear only in the event log. For additional numeric messages, see the control-panel message section of this manual. Figure 2-76 Sample event log Event Log Page 1 Product information Event number Date and time Engine cycles Event log code Firmware version number Description of personality…
-
Page 433: Print Or View An Event Log
Print or view an event log NOTE: The event log in using the Administration menu shows only a subset of events. For a complete event log, use the Service menu. Print or view the event log from the Administration menu From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
-
Page 434
Event log message Description Action 99.00.01 Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not The firmware file is corrupt. Download the performed. The file is corrupt. firmware file and attempt the upgrade again. 99.00.02 Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not The IO timed out during the firmware performed. -
Page 435
Event log message Description Action 99.00.13 Remote firmware upgrade (.bdl) was not The firmware file sent was not the correct file. performed. An invalid file was sent. Download the firmware file again, making 99.00.14 sure to download the file for the correct product model. -
Page 436: Clear Jams
Clear jams Jam locations Use this illustration to troubleshoot jams in the product. Document feeder Stapler/stacker Output path Duplex path (for two-sided printing) Stapler/stacker output bin Output bin Toner cartridge Input trays Optional input trays Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 437: Figure 2-77 Product Base Paper Path And Sensor Locations (1 Of 2)
Figure 2-77 Product base paper path and sensor locations (1 of 2) SR12 Figure 2-78 Product base paper path and sensor locations (2 of 2) Simplex paper path Duplex paper path Duplex re-pickup sensor Duplex reverse sensor Figure 2-79 1×500 paper feeder paper path and sensor locations PF cassette media feed sensor Clear jams ENWW…
-
Page 438: Figure 2-80 1X500 And 3X500 Paper Deck Paper Path And Sensor Locations
Figure 2-80 1×500 and 3×500 paper deck paper path and sensor locations PD cassette 1 media feed sensor SR1 (1×500 and 3×500) PD cassette 2 media feed sensor SR81 (3×500 only) PD cassette 3 media feed sensor SR91 (3×500 only) Figure 2-81 High capacity input (HCI) paper path and sensor locations HCI left cassette…
-
Page 439: Auto-Navigation For Clearing Jams
Figure 2-82 Stapler/stacker paper path and sensor locations SR2103 Output sensor SR2100 Inlet sensor Auto-navigation for clearing jams The auto-navigation feature assists you in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control panel. When you complete a step, the product displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all steps in the procedure.
-
Page 440
Open the document-feeder cover. Lift the jam-access door, and remove any jammed paper. If necessary, rotate the green wheel at the front of the document feeder to remove jammed paper. Close the document-feeder cover. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW… -
Page 441: Clear Jams In The Output-Bin Area
Clear jams in the output-bin area If paper is visible from the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it. Clear jams in the stapler/stacker If paper is visible in the stapler/stacker output bin, grasp the leading edge of the paper and slowly pull the paper out of the product.
-
Page 442
Open the upper-left door. Press the green tab down to open the bar. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW… -
Page 443: Clear Staple Jams
Grasp both sides of the paper, and slowly pull the paper out of the product. Close the upper-left door door. Make sure that both sides of the door snap into place. Clear staple jams To reduce the risk of staple jams, make sure that you staple 30 or fewer pages of paper (80 g/m (20 lb) at a time.
-
Page 444
Open the stapler door. Remove the staple cartridge. Remove any loose staples from the product. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW… -
Page 445
Lift up the lever on the front of the staple cartridge. Remove the sheet of staples from the stapler. Push down the lever on the front of the staple cartridge. Clear jams ENWW… -
Page 446: Clear Jams In Tray 1
Insert the staple cartridge. Close the stapler door. Clear jams in Tray 1 Slowly pull the jammed paper out of the product. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 447: Clear Jams In Tray 2 Or Tray 3
Clear jams in Tray 2 or Tray 3 Open the right-side access door. If the jammed page is visible, gently pull it out of the product. If you were not able to clear the jam by using the right-side access door, slide the tray out of the product.
-
Page 448
If the edge of the paper is visible in the feed area, slowly pull the paper toward the left side and then out of the product. NOTE: Do not force the paper if it will not move easily. If the paper is stuck in a tray, try removing it through the tray above (if applicable) or through the toner-cartridge area. -
Page 449: Clear Jams In The 500-Sheet Trays
Clear jams in the 500-sheet trays Open the right-side access door and the 500- sheet tray jam-access door. Remove the 500-sheet tray. If the edge of the paper is visible in the feed area, slowly pull the paper toward the right side and out of the product.
-
Page 450: Clear Jams In The 3,500-Sheet High-Capacity Tray
Close the 500-sheet tray. Close the right-side access door and the 500- sheet tray jam-access door. Clear jams in the 3,500-sheet high-capacity tray Open the right and left sides of the tray. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 451
Remove any damaged sheets of paper. Above the right-side tray, press the green button to release the jam-access plate. If jammed paper is in the feed area, pull it down to remove it. Clear jams ENWW… -
Page 452
Push up on the jam-access plate to close it. Close the right and left sides of the tray. Open the jam-access door on the right side of the high-capacity tray cabinet. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW… -
Page 453: Clear Jams From The Toner-Cartridge Area
Lift up the jam-release plate and remove any jammed paper. Close the jam-access door on the right side of the high-capacity tray cabinet. Clear jams from the toner-cartridge area Press the cartridge-door-release button. Clear jams ENWW…
-
Page 454
Open the cartridge door. Remove the toner cartridge. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Pull the green tab down to open the metal plate inside the product. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW… -
Page 455
Slowly pull the paper out of the product. Be careful to not tear the paper. CAUTION: Avoid spilling loose toner. Use a dry, lint-free cloth to clean any toner that might have fallen into the product. If loose toner falls into the product, it might cause temporary problems with print quality. -
Page 456: Clear Jams In The Fuser
Clear jams in the fuser Open the fuser door on the left side of the product. CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Push down on the green tab to open the fuser jam-access cover. Remove any paper from the fuser.
-
Page 457
Close the fuser jam-access cover. Close the fuser door. Clear jams ENWW… -
Page 458: Clear Jams From The Duplexer
Clear jams from the duplexer Remove the duplexer. Remove any paper from the duplexer. Reinstall the duplexer. Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW…
-
Page 459: Solve Paper-Handling Problems
Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not fan the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package.
-
Page 460: The Document Feeder Jams, Skews, Or Picks Up Multiple Sheets Of Paper
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper The original might have something on it, such as staples or self-adhesive notes, that must be ● removed. Check that all rollers are in place and that the roller-access cover inside the document feeder is ●…
-
Page 461: Use Manual Print Modes
Use manual print modes Try the following manual print modes to see if they solve the image-quality problems. Select a manual print mode From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. Open the following menus: General Settings ●…
-
Page 462: Table 2-33 Mp Modes Under The Optimize Submenu
Humidity Mode With glossy film, set to High when the product is in a high- humidity environment and print-quality defects occur on HP Tough Paper or Opaque film. With transparencies, set to High when the product is in a high-humidity environment and print-quality defects occur on color transparencies on the first page of a print job.
-
Page 463: Print Quality Troubleshooting Tools
Print quality troubleshooting tools Repetitive defects measurements Use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image-quality problems. Place the ruler next to the first occurrence of the defect on the page. Find the distance between identical defects and use the figure below to identify the component that is causing the defect.
-
Page 464: Solve Image-Quality Problems
Make sure that the toner cartridge is fully installed. The toner cartridge might be almost empty. Check the supplies status, and replace the toner cartridge if necessary. The paper might not meet HP specifications (for example, the paper is too moist or too rough). Light print (entire page) Make sure that the toner cartridge is fully installed.
-
Page 465
Table 2-34 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Image example Solution Stop a print job during the print operation before it is complete, then remove the toner cartridge. Open the photosensitive drum shield, and look at the toner image on the drum. If the image is not fully transferring to the page, replace the transfer ◦… -
Page 466
Table 2-34 Image defect examples (continued) Problem Image example Solution Dropouts Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. Try using a smoother paper. If the transfer roller is deformed or damaged, replace the roller. The high-voltage contact of the static eliminator with the toner cartridge might be dirty. -
Page 467
Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide. The pressure roller is dirty, the fuser film is scratched, or a foreign substance is on the fuser film. -
Page 468
Repeat image This type of defect might occur when using preprinted forms or a large quantity of narrow paper. Verify that the preprinted ink used on forms meets HP specifications Dear Mr. Abhjerhjk, The dhjhfiuhu if teint hhkjhjnf j us a weue jd, fnk ksneh vnk kjdfkaakd ss hsjhnckkajhdhf kashfhnduujdn. -
Page 469
Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. -
Page 470
Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. The toner cartridge might need to be replaced. -
Page 471
Blurred print Make sure that the type and quality of the paper you are using meet HP specifications. For more information, see the product user guide. Make sure that the environmental specifications for the product are being met. Turn over the paper in the tray. Also, try rotating the paper 180°. -
Page 472: Clean The Product
Clean the product Over time, particles of toner and paper accumulate inside the product. This can cause print-quality problems during printing. Cleaning the product eliminates or reduces these problems. Clean the paper path and print-cartridge areas every time that you change the toner cartridge or whenever print-quality problems occur.
-
Page 473
Press the power button to turn off the product, and then disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet. Open the scanner lid. Align paper that has copy defects with the scanner glass to identify the locations of dirt or smudges. Clean the product ENWW… -
Page 474: Clean The Pickup Rollers And Separation Pad In The Document Feeder
Clean the main scanner glass, the document- feeder glass (the small strip of glass on the left side of the scanner), and the white foam backing. Use a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner. Dry the glass and white plastic backing by using a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
-
Page 475
Lift the document-feeder latch. Open the document-feeder cover. Clean the product ENWW… -
Page 476
Remove any visible lint or dust from each of the feed rollers and the separation pad using compressed air or a clean lint-free cloth moistened with warm water. NOTE: Lift up the roller assembly so you can clean the second roller. Close the document-feeder cover. -
Page 477: Solve Performance Problems
Large batches, narrow paper, and Print in smaller batches, on a different special paper such as gloss, type of paper, or on a different size of transparency, cardstock, and HP Tough paper. Paper can slow the print job. Pages did not print.
-
Page 478: Solve Connectivity Problems
The product IP address is listed on the product configuration page. If you installed the product using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always print to this printer, even if its IP address changes.
-
Page 479: The Computer Is Unable To Communicate With The Product
If you installed the product using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the hostname instead of the IP address. If the IP address is correct, delete the product and then add it again. The computer is unable to communicate with the product Test network communication by pinging the product.
-
Page 480: Service Mode Functions
Service mode functions Service menu Service menu is PIN-protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access to Service menu. When you select Service from the list of menus, the product prompts you to type an eight-digit personal identification number (PIN). NOTE: The product automatically exits the Service…
-
Page 481
First level Second level Value Description ADF Simplex Count Set the total single-sided pages fed through the document feeder. ADF Duplex Count Set the total two-sided pages fed through the document feeder. Copy Scan Count Set the total copy pages that have been scanned. -
Page 482
First level Second level Value Description Hook Operations Off Hook On Hook Generate Random Data Select a value from the list. Generate DTMF Tone Burst Select a value from the list. Generate DTMF Continuous Tone Select a value from the list. Generate Pulse Burst Select a value from… -
Page 483: Convert Service Id To Actual Date
Product resets Restore factory-set defaults From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button. Open the following menus: General Settings ● Restore Factory Settings ● Touch the Reset button. Restore the service ID Restore the service ID If you replace the formatter, the date is lost.
-
Page 484: Cold Reset Using Preboot Menu
Product cold reset Cold reset using the Preboot menu Turn the product on. Touch the HP logo that displays in the center of the touchscreen until the Preboot menu opens. Use the down arrow button to highlight Administrator, and then touch the button.
-
Page 485: Partial Clean
The product default settings are not properly working. ● Execute a 3 Partial Clean Turn the product on. Touch the HP logo that displays in the center of the touchscreen until the Preboot menu opens. Touch the down arrow button to highlight Administrator, and then touch the button.
-
Page 486: Format Disk
To reset the product by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings. ● Execute a 2 Format Disk Turn the product on. Touch the HP logo that displays in the center of the touchscreen until the Preboot menu opens. Use the down arrow button to highlight Administrator, and then touch the button.
-
Page 487: Solve Fax Problems
Solve fax problems Checklist for solving fax problems Use the following checklist to help identify the cause of any fax-related problems you encounter: Are you using the fax cable supplied with the fax accessory? This fax accessory has ● been tested with the supplied fax cable to meet RJ11 and functional specifications. Do not substitute another fax cable;…
-
Page 488: Are You Using A Phone Company Voice-Messaging Service Or An Answering Machine
Are you using a phone company voice-messaging service or an answering machine? If the rings-to-answer setting for the messaging service is lower than the rings-to-answer setting for the fax accessory, the messaging service answers the call, and the fax accessory cannot receive faxes. If the rings-to-answer setting for the fax accessory is lower than that of the messaging service, the fax accessory answers all calls.
-
Page 489: Check Fax Accessory Status
The fax accessory is installed and operational; however, the HP Digital Sending utility has either disabled the product fax feature or has enabled LAN fax. When LAN fax is enabled, the analog-fax feature is disabled. Only one fax feature, either LAN fax or analog fax, can be enabled at a time.
-
Page 490: General Fax Problems
Software Configuration utility to enable the fax address book feature. Not able to locate the Fax settings in Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin are Select Digital Sending and Fax from HP Web Jetadmin. located under the device’s status page the drop-down menu.
-
Page 491: Use Fax Over Voip Networks
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). Fax is very dependent upon timing and signal quality, so a fax transmission is more sensitive to a VoIP environment. The following are suggested changes in settings for the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500 when it is connected to a VoIP service: Begin with the fax speed set in Fast (V.34) mode and with Error Correction Mode (ECM) turned…
-
Page 492: Problems With Receiving Faxes
Problems with receiving faxes Problem Cause Solution Incoming fax calls are not being The rings-to-answer setting might not be Check the rings-to-answer setting. answered by the fax accessory (no fax set correctly. detected). The fax cable might not be connected Check the installation.
-
Page 493
Problem Cause Solution The product is either low on toner or has If configured, the product stops printing run out of toner. as soon as it is low on toner or runs out of toner. Any faxes received are stored in memory and print after the toner has been replaced. -
Page 494: Problems With Sending Faxes
Problems with sending faxes Problem Cause Solution Faxes are transmitting very slowly. You might be sending a complex fax, Complex faxes take longer to transmit. such as one with many graphics. The receiving fax machine might have a The fax accessory only sends the fax at slow modem speed.
-
Page 495
Problem Cause Solution Outgoing fax calls keep dialing. The fax accessory automatically redials This is normal operation. If you do not a fax number if the Redial on Busy want the fax to retry, set the Redial on option is on or if the Redial on No Busy option to 0, set the… -
Page 496: Fax Error Codes
T.30 Protocol Trace. Print one of these reports to obtain the error code. A detailed description of the error codes and the appropriate action is available at www.hp.com. Search for HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500.
-
Page 497: Send-Fax Messages
Send-fax messages Table 2-36 Send-fax messages Message Error No. Description Action Cancelled Someone cancelled the fax at the None. product control panel. Success The fax was sent successfully. None. Fail Busy The receiving fax machine is The fax will be retired busy.
-
Page 498: Receive-Fax Messages
Receive-fax messages Table 2-37 Receive-fax messages Message Error No. Description Action Success The fax transmission was None. successful. Blocked The receiving fax machine is None. using the blocked-number feature and is blocking this fax. Failed The fax might be corrupted or Ask the sender to resend the fax;…
-
Page 499: Service Settings
Service settings These items in the control-panel menus are intended to be used when an HP service representative is assisting you. Settings in the Troubleshooting menu From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
-
Page 500: Product Upgrades
Product upgrades To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the product, go to www.hp.com/go/ ljMFPM725_firmware. Determine the installed revision of firmware Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware. On the configuration page, look in the section marked Device Information for the firmware datecode and firmware revision.
-
Page 501: Usb Storage Device (Preboot Menu)
Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the product control panel. Turn the product on. Touch the HP logo that displays in the center of the touchscreen until the Preboot menu opens. Wait for the Pre-Boot menu to appear on the control-panel display, and then touch the down arrow button to scroll to Administrator.
-
Page 502: Usb Storage Device (Control-Panel Menu)
USB storage device (control-panel menu) Copy the xxxxxxx.bdl file to a portable USB flash drive. Turn the product on, and then wait until it reaches the Ready state. From the Home screen on the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Device Maintenance button.
-
Page 503: Appendix A Service And Support
Service and support Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ● HP’s Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet toner cartridge limited warranty statement ● HP policy on non-HP supplies ● HP anticounterfeit Web site ● Data stored on the toner cartridge ● End User License Agreement ●…
-
Page 504: Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
-
Page 505
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ENWW… -
Page 506: Hp’s Premium Protection Warranty: Laserjet Toner Cartridge Limited Warranty Statement
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.
-
Page 507: Hp Policy On Non-Hp Supplies
For HP printer products, the use of a non-HP toner cartridge or a refilled toner cartridge does not affect either the warranty to the customer or any HP support contract with the customer. However, if product failure or damage is attributable to the use of a non-HP toner cartridge or refilled toner cartridge, HP will charge its standard time and materials charges to service the product for the particular failure or damage.
-
Page 508: Hp Anticounterfeit Web Site
HP toner cartridge and the control-panel message says the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem. Your toner cartridge might not be a genuine HP toner cartridge if you notice the following: The supplies status page indicates that a non-HP supply is installed.
-
Page 509: Data Stored On The Toner Cartridge
Data stored on the toner cartridge The HP toner cartridges used with this product contain a memory chip that assists in the operation of the product. In addition, this memory chip collects a limited set of information about the usage of the product, which…
-
Page 510: End User License Agreement
(b) Hewlett-Packard Company (“HP”) that governs your use of the software product (“Software”). This EULA does not apply if there is a separate license agreement between you and HP or its suppliers for the Software, including a license agreement in online documentation. The term “Software” may include (i) associated media, (ii) a user guide and other printed materials, and (iii) “online”…
-
Page 511
CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. HP and its affiliates may collect and use technical information you provide in relation to (i) your Use of the Software or the HP Product, or (ii) the provision of support services related to the Software or the HP Product. All such information will be subject to HP’s privacy policy. -
Page 512
© 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Rev. 04/09 Appendix A Service and support ENWW… -
Page 513: Openssl
OpenSSL This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/) THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT «AS IS» AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
-
Page 514: Customer Self-Repair Warranty Service
If during the diagnosis period, HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory.
-
Page 515: Customer Support
Customer support Get telephone support for your country/region Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/. Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and problem description ready. Get 24-hour Internet support www.hp.com/support/ljMFPM725…
-
Page 516
Appendix A Service and support ENWW… -
Page 517: Appendix B Product Specifications
Product specifications Physical specifications ● Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ● Environmental specifications ● ENWW…
-
Page 518: Physical Specifications
1171 mm (46.1 in) 1112 mm (43.8 in) Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions www.hp.com/go/ljMFPM725_regulatory-environmental for current information. CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. This will damage the product and void the product warranty.
-
Page 519: Appendix C Regulatory Information
Regulatory information FCC regulations ● Environmental product stewardship program ● Declaration of conformity ● Declaration of conformity (fax models) ● Certificate of Volatility ● Safety statements ● Additional statements for telecom (fax) products ● ENWW…
-
Page 520: Fcc Regulations
NOTE: Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
-
Page 521: Environmental Product Stewardship Program
Toner consumption EconoMode uses less toner, which might extend the life of the toner cartridge. HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, the toner supply might outlast the mechanical parts in the toner cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and is no longer acceptable, consider replacing the toner cartridge.
-
Page 522: Hp Laserjet Print Supplies
Return and recycling instructions United States and Puerto Rico The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more HP LaserJet toner cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below.
-
Page 523: Non-U.s. Returns
Paper This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002. Material restrictions This HP product does not contain added mercury.
-
Page 524: Disposal Of Waste Equipment By Users
For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle, or contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment.
-
Page 525
HP’s environmental management system ● HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program ● Material Safety Data Sheets ● Visit www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment. Environmental product stewardship program ENWW… -
Page 526: Declaration Of Conformity
Hewlett-Packard Company DoC#: BOISB-1105-01-Rel.1.0 Manufacturer’s Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product Product Name: HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M725dn BOISB-1105-01 Regulatory Model Numbers: Product Options: Toner Cartridges: CF214A, CF214X conforms to the following Product Specifications:…
-
Page 527
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ- TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D–71034 Böblingen, Germany (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143) www.hp.com/go/certificates USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho… -
Page 528: Declaration Of Conformity (Fax Models)
DoC#: BOISB-1105-02-Rel.1.0 Manufacturer’s Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product Product Name: HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M725f, HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M725z, HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M725z+ Regulatory Model: BOISB-1105-02 BOISB-0703-00 – Fax Module Product Options:…
-
Page 529
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ- TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143) www.hp.com/go/certificates USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho… -
Page 530: Certificate Of Volatility
There are no steps to clear this factory product configuration data. data required for the device to function. User modifications are limited to downloading digitally signed HP firmware images. Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:…
-
Page 531: Figure C-2 Certificate Of Volatility (2 Of 2)
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)? No If Yes please describe below Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. Restore encrypted backed-up system settings. USB ports can be disabled.
-
Page 532: Safety Statements
Safety statements Laser safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.
-
Page 533: Emc Statement (China)
överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. HUOLTO HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M725dn, M725f, M725z, M725z+ — kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta…
-
Page 534
tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja. VARO ! Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING ! Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. -
Page 535: Gs Statement (Germany)
GS statement (Germany) Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert warden. Das Gerät ist kein Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß BildscharbV. Bei ungünstigen Lichtverhältnissen (z. B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen auf dem Display und damit zu Einschränkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen.
-
Page 536: Additional Statements For Telecom (Fax) Products
Additional statements for telecom (fax) products EU Statement for Telecom Operation This product is intended to be connected to the analog Public Switched Telecommunication Networks (PSTN) of European Economic Area (EEA) countries/regions. It meets requirements of EU R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries appropriate CE conformity marking.
-
Page 537: Telephone Consumer Protection Act (Us)
number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area. This equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C. An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack, which is Part 68 compliant.
-
Page 538: Vietnam Telecom Wired/Wireless Marking For Ictqc Type Approved Products
cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution can be particularly important in rural areas. CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
-
Page 539: Index
Calibrate/Cleaning menu 294 Copy Settings menu 231 clearing paper jams 417 error messages 391 jams, clearing 421 Display Settings menu 268 non-HP 475 Fax Settings menu 250 Accessories recycling 490 General Settings menu 223 3,500-sheet high-capacity input replace message 391…
-
Page 540
PCA sensors 54 event log messages 400 document feeder count home button is unresponsive 131 document feeder pages 448 HP Customer Care 483 document feeder interval 448 feeding problems 458 HP fraud Web site 476 Index ENWW… -
Page 541
HP Jetdirect print server laser-beam exposure stage, image Backup/Restore 293 configuration page 219 formation operations 26 Calibrate/Cleaning 294 lights 133 latent-image formation 25 Copy Settings 231 Display Settings 268 leading edge detection 50 LEDs. See lights Fax Settings 250 image defects, problem-solving… -
Page 542
437 recycling 490 loose toner 435 paper jams electronic hardware 492 manual print modes 429 3,500-sheet high-capacity HP printing supplies returns and misformed characters 436 tray 418 environmental program 490 repeating defects 436 detection operations 50 repeating defects, problem-… -
Page 543
476 sensor tests manual diagnostic tests 139 error messages 391 tray 4 paper size sensors (SW2 document feeder 54 non-HP 475 jam detection operations 50 recycling 490 and SW3) 168 sensor tests manual tray/bin pickup-and-feed system replace message 391… -
Page 544
Web sites jams, clearing 421 list 401 customer support 483 memory chips 477 flowchart 122 fraud reports 476 non-HP 475 Material Safety Data Sheet recycling 490 jams 404 (MSDS) 492 replace message 391 lights, using 133 warranty 474… -
Page 546
© 2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. www.hp.com *CF066-91023* *CF066-91023* CF066-91023…
07:31
#70 Принтер HP LaserJet Enterprise 700 M712 M725 шумит, трещит | Ремонт редуктора принтера HP
12:09
HP Laserjet M712 M725 Fuser Maintenance Kit Installation + Reset Instructions (VIDEO)
02:56
HP M525 M575 M630 M651 M680 M725 M775 ADF Document Feeder Kit L2725-60002 L2718A
06:03
МФУ HP LaserJet Enterprise серии М630
05:43
HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP M725 Error: 99.09.67 Solved
07:38
#110 МФУ HP Color LaserJet M525 M575 M725 M775 не работает дисплей | Белый экран при включении
05:20
HP LaserJet 500 MFP M525 Configuración por Red DHCP
04:12
Installation and Configuration of hp laserjet 700 color mfp m775
взаимодействием факса, в результате этого может понизиться качество телефонного сигнала.
Если при использовании этих устройств появились проблемы с отправкой или получением
факсов, попробуйте подключить факсимильный аппарат напрямую к телефонной розетке,
чтобы определить, заключается ли проблема в устройстве для защиты от скачков напряжения.
Используется ли такая услуга телефонной компании, как передача речевых
сообщений или автоответчик?
Если число гудков, установленных для службы передачи сообщений, меньше, чем число
гудков, установленных для ответа факса на вызов, служба передачи сообщений ответит на
вызов, сделав невозможным тем самым получение факса. Если число гудков, установленных
для факсимильного аппарата, меньше, чем число гудков, установленных для ответа службы
передачи сообщений, факс ответит на вызов первым.
Оснащен ли телефон функцией ожидания вызова?
Если на телефоне включена функция ожидания вызова, то вызов факса может быть прерван
уведомлением об ожидающем вызове. Убедитесь в том, что на телефонной линии факса
функция ожидания вызова выключена.
Проверка состояния факс-платы
Если аналоговая факс-плата не работает, распечатайте отчет
Страница конфигурации
, чтобы
проверить состояние устройства.
1.
Прокрутите список на главном экране и нажмите кнопку
Администрирование
.
2.
Откройте следующие меню:
●
Отчеты
●
Страницы конфигурации/состояния
●
Страница конфигурации
3.
Нажмите кнопку
Печать
, чтобы распечатать отчет о конфигурации, или кнопку
Вид
, чтобы
просмотреть его на экране. Отчет состоит из нескольких страниц.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ.
IP-адрес или имя хоста устройства можно найти на странице Jetdirect.
В разделе «Страница факс-платы» страницы конфигурации под заголовком «Информация об
аппаратном обеспечении» проверьте значение «Состояние модема». В следующей таблице
представлены условия состояния и возможные решения.
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ.
Если Страница конфигурации факса не печатается, возможно, что-то не в
порядке с факс-платой. тПри включенной передаче факсов по локальной сети или Интернету
функция может быть отключена.
Функционирует / включено
1
Аналоговый факс установлен и готов к работе.
RUWW
Устранение неполадок факса
287
Функционирует / выключено
1
Факс-плата установлена, но вы еще не настроили
соответствующие функции.
Факс-плата установлена и функционирует, однако
утилита HP Digital Sending либо отключила функцию
факса для МФУ, либо включила отправку факсов по
локальной сети. При включении факса по ЛВС
происходит отключение функции аналогового факса. В
один момент времени может использоваться только одна
функция факса (или отправка факса по локальной сети,
или аналоговый факс).
ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ.
Если включена функция факса по ЛВС,
функция
Факс
недоступна в панели управления.
Не функционирует / включено / выключено
1
Устройством определен сбой микропрограммы.
Обновите микропрограмму
Поврежден / включено / выключено
1
Сбой факс-платы. Вставьте заново факс-плату, проверив
ее на наличие погнутых контактов. Если после этого все
еще отображается состояние «ПОВРЕЖДЕН», замените
факс-плату.
1
Состояние «ВКЛЮЧЕНО» показывает, что аналоговый факс разрешен и включен; состояние «ВЫКЛЮЧЕНО»
показывает, что включен факс по ЛВС (факс-плата отключена).
Общие проблемы с факсом
Проблема
Причина
Устранение
Сбой при отправке факса.
Включено сжатие JBIG, которое не
поддерживается факсимильным
аппаратом получателя.
Отключите параметр JBIG.
На дисплее панели управления
отображается сообщение «Out of
Memory» (Недостаточно памяти).
Диск устройства заполнен.
Удалите некоторые сохраненные
задания с диска. На главном экране
панели управления устройства
нажмите кнопку
Получить из памяти
устройства
. Откройте список
сохраненных заданий и факсов.
Выберите имя задания и нажмите
кнопку
Удалить
.
Качество печати фотографий низкое
или печатаются серые поля.
Вы используете неверные установки
содержания страницы или
разрешения.
Попробуйте установить для
параметра
Оптимизация текста/
фотографий
значение
Фото
.
Клавиша Стоп
на клавиатуре
устройства, нажатая для прерывания
отправки факса, не срабатывает,
факс все равно отправляется.
Если процесс отправки задания
зашел слишком далеко, отменить его
невозможно.
Это нормальное состояние.
Отсутствует кнопка адресной книги
факсов.
Адресная книга факсов не включена.
Воспользуйтесь утилитой настройки
HP MFP Digital Sending Software
Configuration Utility, чтобы включить
адресную книгу факсов.
288
Глава 10 Решение проблем
RUWW
Проблема
Причина
Устранение
Не удается найти параметры факса в
утилите HP Web Jetadmin.
Параметры факса в HP Web Jetadmin
находятся под раскрывающимся
меню на странице состояния
устройства.
Выберите Цифровая отправка и
факс из раскрывающегося списка.
Заголовок смещается в верхнюю
часть страницы при установке
режима наложения.
Для всех пересылаемых фасов
устройство накладывает
соответствующий заголовок в
верхней части страницы.
Это нормальное состояние.
Смесь номеров и имен в поле
получателей.
Могут показываться и номера, и
имена получателей в зависимости от
того, откуда они берутся. Адресная
книга факса перечисляет имена,
остальные источники перечисляют
номера.
Это нормальное состояние.
Одностраничный факс печатается
как двухстраничный.
Заголовок факса помещается в
верхнюю часть страницы, сдвигая
текст на вторую страницу.
Если нужно, чтобы одностраничный
факс печатался на одной странице,
установите наложение заголовка в
режиме наложения или настройте
параметр «Уместить на странице».
Документ останавливается в
устройстве подачи в середине
отправки.
Замятие в устройстве подачи.
Устраните замятие и повторите
отправку факса.
Звук, издаваемый факсимильным
аппаратом, слишком громкий или
слишком тихий.
Нужно настроить параметр звука.
Отрегулируйте объем в меню
Параметры отправки факса
и меню
Параметры получения факса
.
Использование факса с сетями VoIP
Технология VoIP преобразует аналоговый телефонный сигнал в цифровые биты. Биты
собираются в пакеты, которые передаются по сети Интернет. Пакеты преобразуются назад в
аналоговые сигналы в пункте назначения или возле него.
Передача информации через Интернет осуществляется в цифровой форме вместо
аналоговой. Поэтому существуют определенные условия для передачи факсов, для которых
могут потребоваться настройки факса, отличающиеся от настроек для аналоговой
коммутируемой телефонной сети общественного пользования. Факс в значительной мере
зависит от задержек на линии и качества сигнала, поэтому передача факса чувствительна к
среде VoIP.
Ниже приведены предлагаемые параметры аналоговой факс-платы Analog Fax Accessory 500
(для принтеров HP LaserJet) при подключении услуги VoIP.
●
Сначала переведите факс в режим V.34 (Fast) и включите режим исправления ошибок
ECM. Протокол V.34 обрабатывает любые изменения скорости передачи для обеспечения
работы сетей VoIP.
●
Если в режиме V.34 происходит много ошибок и повторов, выключите этот режим и
установите режим V.17 (режим «Средний»).
RUWW
Устранение неполадок факса
289
●
Если ошибки и повторы продолжаются, установите меньшую скорость факса, так как
некоторые системы VoIP не могут обрабатывать высокие скорости сигнала при отправке
факса.
●
В редких случаях, если ошибки продолжают возникать, выключите режим исправления
ошибок. Качество изображения может ухудшиться. Перед тем как использовать эти
настройки, убедитесь, что при выключенном режиме исправления ошибок качество
изображения приемлемое.
●
Если описанные выше настройки не повысили надежность факса в режиме VoIP,
обратитесь за помощью к поставщику услуг VoIP.
Проблемы с получением факсов
Неполадка
Причина
Решение
Факс не отвечает на входящие
вызовы других факсов (факс не
обнаружен).
Возможно, неверно задан параметр
числа звонков до ответа.
Проверьте значение количества
звонков до ответа.
Телефонный кабель подключен
неправильно или неисправен.
Проверьте установку. Убедитесь в
том, что применяемый телефонный
кабель взят из комплекта факс-
платы.
Телефонная линия не
функционирует.
Отключите факсимильный аппарат
от розетки и подключите телефон.
Попробуйте позвонить с телефона,
чтобы убедиться, что телефонная
линия работает.
Если вы используете коммутатор,
возможно, что неправильно
настроены сигналы вызова.
Проверьте настройка сигналов
вызова на коммутаторе.
Возможно, что факсу мешает
система голосовых сообщений.
Выполните одно из указанных ниже
действий.
●
Отключите функцию голосовых
сообщений.
●
Подключите факс к отдельной
телефонной линии.
●
Уменьшите количество гудков
перед ответом для факса, чтобы
оно было меньше, чем
количество гудков перед
ответом для голосовой почты.
Факсы принимаются очень медленно. Возможно, вы получаете или
отправляете очень сложный факс,
состоящий из большого числа
графических изображений.
Сложные факсимильные сообщения
требуют больше времени для
получения.
290
Глава 10 Решение проблем
RUWW
Неполадка
Причина
Решение
Возможно, у принимающего
факсимильного аппарата низкая
скорость модема.
Факс-плата принимает факсы с
самой высокой модемной скоростью
из тех, которая поддерживаются
отправляющим устройством.
Подождите до завершения передачи.
При отправке или получении факса
выбрано чрезмерно высокое
разрешение. Как правило,
повышенное разрешение улучшает
качество изображения, но
увеличивает продолжительность
передачи.
Попросите отправителя уменьшить
разрешение и передать факс еще
раз.
Если телефонная линия
некачественная, факс-плата и
принимающее устройство замедляют
передачу, чтобы обработать ошибки.
Попросите отправителя повторить
отправку факса. Нужно, чтобы
компания проверила телефонную
линию.
Факсы не печатаются устройством.
Загрузите бумагу во входной лоток.
.Загрузите бумагу. Любые факсы,
полученные при отсутствии носителя
в лотке, сохраняются. Они будут
распечатаны после заполнения
лотка.
Функция
Расписание печати факсов
включена.
Факсы распечатываются в
соответствии с графиком. Чтобы
распечатать факсы немедленно,
отключите функцию
Расписание
печати факсов
.
В устройстве мало тонера или тонер
закончился.
Устройство приостанавливает
печать, если тонера мало (или когда
тонер заканчивается). Любые
полученные факсы хранятся в
памяти и распечатываются после
замены тонера.
Входящий вызов может быть
голосовым вызовом.
Входящие голосовые вызовы обычно
обозначаются в журнале факса как
ошибка Факс не обнаружен.
Поскольку это голосовые вызовы, а
не факсовые, действий не требуется.
Прерван прием факса.
Убедитесь в том, что для
телефонной линии факса не
включена функция ожидания вызова.
Процесс приема факса может быть
прерван сообщением об ожидающем
вызове, в результате чего
произойдет ошибка соединения.
Для параметра функции
Расписание
печати факсов
выбрано значение
Всегда сохранять факсы
.
Измените значение параметра
Расписание печати факсов
на
Всегда
печатать факсы
.
RUWW
Устранение неполадок факса
291
Проблемы с отправкой факсов
Проблема
Причина
Решение
Факсы передаются очень медленно
Возможно, вы получаете или
отправляете очень сложный факс,
состоящий из большого числа
графических изображений.
Сложные факсимильные сообщения
требуют больше времени для
получения.
Возможно, у принимающего
факсимильного аппарата низкая
скорость модема.
Факс-плата отправляет факсы с
самой высокой модемной скоростью,
которая поддерживается
устройством. Подождите до
завершения передачи.
При отправке или получении факса
выбрано чрезмерно высокое
разрешение. Как правило,
повышенное разрешение улучшает
качество изображения, но
увеличивает продолжительность
передачи.
Уменьшите разрешение и измените
параметр
Оптимизация текста/
фотографий
.
Если телефонная линия
некачественная, факс-плата и
принимающее устройство замедляют
передачу, чтобы обработать ошибки.
Отмените отправку факса и
запустите ее вновь. Нужно, чтобы
компания проверила телефонную
линию.
Если у документа серый фон, то
увеличивает время передачи.
Воспользуйтесь функцией
Настройка
изображения
для очистки фона.
Прекращается отправка факсов.
Устройство, получающее факс,
может быть неисправно.
Попробуйте отправить факс на
другие устройства.
Телефонная линия не
функционирует.
Отключите факсимильный аппарат
от розетки и подключите телефон.
Попробуйте позвонить с телефона,
чтобы убедиться, что телефонная
линия работает.
Возможно, качество связи вашей
телефонной линии низкое, или
присутствуют помехи.
Попробуйте выбрать более низкую
скорость передачи, чтобы улучшить
надежность передачи. При помощи
меню
Параметры набора факсов
установите скорость отправки
факсов.
Возможно, включена функция
ожидания вызова
Убедитесь в том, что для
телефонной линии факса не
включена функция ожидания вызова.
Процесс приема факса может быть
прерван сообщением об ожидающем
вызове, в результате чего
произойдет ошибка соединения.
Факс-плата получает факсы, но не
отправляет их.
Если факс установлен в системе
PBX, система PBX может
формировать тональный вызов,
мешающий обнаружению факса.
Отключите параметр обнаружения
тонального сигнала.
292
Глава 10 Решение проблем
RUWW
Коды ошибок факса, Сообщения об ошибках факса на панели управления
Страница 307
- Изображение
- Текст
Проблема
Причина
Решение
Возможно, телефонное соединение
некачественное.
Попробуйте повторить попытку
позже.
Устройство, получающее факс,
может быть неисправно.
Попробуйте отправить факс на
другие устройства.
Телефонная линия не
функционирует.
Отключите факсимильный аппарат
от розетки и подключите телефон.
Попробуйте позвонить с телефона,
чтобы убедиться, что телефонная
линия работает.
Дозвон при отправке факса.
Факс-плата автоматически повторяет
набор, если функция
Повтор при
занятости
включена или функция
Повтор набора при отсутствии ответа
включена.
Это нормальное состояние. Если вы
не хотите повторения набора,
установите функцию
Повтор при
занятости
на 0,
Повтор набора при
отсутствии ответа
на 0 и
Повтор при
ошибке связи
на 0.
Отправляемые факсы не приходят на
получающее устройство.
Возможно, получающее устройство
выключено или возникли ошибки,
например, нет бумаги.
Попросите получателя, чтобы он
убедился, что устройство включено и
готово к приему факсов.
Возможно, факс находится в памяти
и ожидает повторного набора
занятого номера, или существуют
другие задания, которые ожидают
отправки.
Если факс сохранен в памяти по
одной из указанных причин, в
рабочем журнале факса появляется
соответствующая запись.
Распечатайте журнал активности
факса и проверьте, нет ли в столбце
Результат заданий с состоянием
Отложено.
Коды ошибок факса
В случае возникновения проблем с факсом, которые мешают или прерывают получение факса,
формируется код ошибки, с помощью которого можно определить причину, вызвавшую
проблему. Коды ошибок можно посмотреть в журнале активности факса, в отчете по вызовам
факса, а также в трассировке протокола T.30. Распечатайте один из этих трех журналов для
получения кода ошибки. Подробные описания кодов ошибок и способов их устранения
находятся на веб-сервере
www.hp.com
. Поиск: аналоговой факс-платы Analog Fax Accessory
500 для принтеров HP LaserJet.
Сообщения об ошибках факса на панели управления
Если процесс передачи факса прерван или произошла ошибка, подсистема факса создает
отчет состояния/ошибки в устройстве из двух частей. После нормальной или успешной
отправки факса создаются сообщения об успешной отправке. Сообщение состоит из текста
описания и числового кода (лишь некоторые сообщения не содержат код). На панели
управления устройства отображается только тестовая часть сообщения, однако в Отчете об
активности факса, Отчете по вызовам факса и Трассировке T.30 факса отображается как
текстовая, так и числовая часть. Числовой код отображается в скобках после текстовой части
сообщения отчета.
RUWW
Устранение неполадок факса
293
модем генерирует числовой код. Обычно числовой код …
Страница 308
- Изображение
- Текст
Факс-модем генерирует числовой код. Обычно числовой код (0) означает нормальный ответ
модема. Некоторые сообщения всегда отображают числовой код (0), некоторые сообщения
могут иметь целый диапазон кодов, и лишь немногие сообщения не имеют числового кода.
Обычно числовой код (0) означает ошибку, которая не связана с факс-модемом, а произошла в
другой части подсистемы факса или в другой подсистеме устройства (например, в подсистеме
печати). Ненулевые коды ошибок предоставляют подробности о конкретных действиях или
процессах, выполненных модемом. Такие коды не всегда указывают на неполадку в модеме.
Постоянно повторяющиеся сообщения об ошибках с числовыми кодами, которые не указаны в
данном документе, требуют обращения в службу поддержки клиентов. Распечатайте
трассировку T.30 факса для облегчения распознавания неполадки до того, как обращаться в
службу поддержки клиентов. Трассировка содержит подробности последнего факсового
вызова.
1.
На главном экране панели управления устройства перейдите к кнопке
Администрирование
и нажмите ее.
2.
Откройте следующие меню:
●
Устранение неполадок
●
Факс
●
Трассировка T.30 факса
3.
Выберите
Печать отчета по T.30
для печати отчета.
294
Глава 10 Решение проблем
RUWW
Сообщения об отправке факса, Ruww устранение неполадок факса 295
Страница 309
- Изображение
- Текст
Сообщения об отправке факса
Таблица 10-1
Сообщения об отправке факса
Сообщение
Номер ошибки:
Описание
Действие
Отменено
0
Кто-то отменил отправку
факса с панели управления
устройства.
Нет.
Успешно
Н/Д
Сообщение успешно
отправлено.
Нет.
Сбой, занято
0
Устройство, принимающее
факс, занято.
Повторная попытка отправки
будет выполнена
автоматически (если
настроено), в противном
случае отправьте факс позже.
Нет ответа
0 или 17.
Устройство, принимающее
факс, не отвечает, или на
вызов ответил человек.
Устройство, принимающее
факс, может быть отключено
от линии или выключено.
Свяжитесь с получателем и
уточните состояние
устройства. Попробуйте
выполнить повторную
отправку.
Нет сигнала в линии
0
При отправке факса не
удалось распознать сигнал
свободной линии.
Убедитесь, что телефонная
линия работает, установите
отправляющий факс в режим
«нет» для распознания
тонального сигнала.
Не удалось
Любое
Возможно, факс поврежден
или не отправлен.
Попробуйте повторно
отправить факс.
Не удалось
0
Несовместимая ширина
страницы или страница
содержит слишком много
поврежденных строк.
Попробуйте отправить факс
еще раз. Если ошибка не
устраняется, обратитесь в
службу технической
поддержки.
Не удалось
17 или 36.
Телефонное соединение
между отправителем и
получателем прервано.
Неполадка может быть
вызвана тем, что передача
факса прервана голосовыми
вызовами, или на вызов
ответил человек.
Попробуйте выполнить
повторную отправку факса.
Не удалось или Ошибка
связи.
Любой, кроме 17 или 36
Обычная проблема
взаимодействия: передача
была прервана или прошла
неудачно.
Попробуйте отправить факс
еще раз. Если ошибка не
устраняется, обратитесь в
службу технической
поддержки.
RUWW
Устранение неполадок факса
295
Таблица 10-1
Сообщения об отправке факса (продолжение)
Сообщение
Номер ошибки:
Описание
Действие
Сбой, пробел
0
Не удается прочитать или
записать файл изображения
факса на диск. Возможно,
диск устройства поврежден
или на нем нет свободного
места.
Попробуйте отправить факс
еще раз. Если ошибка не
устраняется, обратитесь в
службу технической
поддержки.
Ошибка памяти
0
Недостаточно оперативной
памяти в устройстве.
Если ошибка не устраняется,
удалите часть элементов из
памяти устройства, например,
сохраненные работы для
печати или сохраненные
факсы.
Сбой, питание
0
Время передачи было
отключено питание
отправляющего
факсимильного аппарата.
Попробуйте выполнить
повторную отправку факса.
296
Глава 10 Решение проблем
RUWW
Комментарии
Проблема
Причина
Решение
Возможно, телефонное соединение
некачественное.
Попробуйте повторить попытку
позже.
Устройство, получающее факс,
может быть неисправно.
Попробуйте отправить факс на
другие устройства.
Телефонная линия не
функционирует.
Отключите факсимильный аппарат
от розетки и подключите телефон.
Попробуйте позвонить с телефона,
чтобы убедиться, что телефонная
линия работает.
Дозвон при отправке факса.
Факс-плата автоматически повторяет
набор, если функция
Повтор при
занятости
включена или функция
Повтор набора при отсутствии ответа
включена.
Это нормальное состояние. Если вы
не хотите повторения набора,
установите функцию
Повтор при
занятости
на 0,
Повтор набора при
отсутствии ответа
на 0 и
Повтор при
ошибке связи
на 0.
Отправляемые факсы не приходят на
получающее устройство.
Возможно, получающее устройство
выключено или возникли ошибки,
например, нет бумаги.
Попросите получателя, чтобы он
убедился, что устройство включено и
готово к приему факсов.
Возможно, факс находится в памяти
и ожидает повторного набора
занятого номера, или существуют
другие задания, которые ожидают
отправки.
Если факс сохранен в памяти по
одной из указанных причин, в
рабочем журнале факса появляется
соответствующая запись.
Распечатайте журнал активности
факса и проверьте, нет ли в столбце
Результат заданий с состоянием
Отложено.
Коды ошибок факса
В случае возникновения проблем с факсом, которые мешают или прерывают получение факса,
формируется код ошибки, с помощью которого можно определить причину, вызвавшую
проблему. Коды ошибок можно посмотреть в журнале активности факса, в отчете по вызовам
факса, а также в трассировке протокола T.30. Распечатайте один из этих трех журналов для
получения кода ошибки. Подробные описания кодов ошибок и способов их устранения
находятся на веб-сервере
www.hp.com
. Поиск: аналоговой факс-платы Analog Fax Accessory
500 для принтеров HP LaserJet.
Сообщения об ошибках факса на панели управления
Если процесс передачи факса прерван или произошла ошибка, подсистема факса создает
отчет состояния/ошибки в устройстве из двух частей. После нормальной или успешной
отправки факса создаются сообщения об успешной отправке. Сообщение состоит из текста
описания и числового кода (лишь некоторые сообщения не содержат код). На панели
управления устройства отображается только тестовая часть сообщения, однако в Отчете об
активности факса, Отчете по вызовам факса и Трассировке T.30 факса отображается как
текстовая, так и числовая часть. Числовой код отображается в скобках после текстовой части
сообщения отчета.
RUWW
Устранение неполадок факса
293
Контрольный список устранения неполадок
Для устранения неисправностей принтера следуйте приведенным ниже инструкциям.
-
Если панель управления выглядит пустой или черной, выполните следующие действия:
-
Проверьте кабель питания.
-
Проверьте, включено ли питание устройства.
-
Убедитесь, что линейное напряжение соответствует настройкам принтера. (Требования к напряжению см. на этикетке на задней панели принтера.) В случае использования сетевого фильтра при напряжении, не соответствующем характеристикам, вставьте вилку шнура питания устройства непосредственно в стенную розетку. Если оно уже включено в стенную розетку, попробуйте воспользоваться другой розеткой.
-
Если ни одно из этих действий не поможет восстановить электропитание, обратитесь в службу поддержки клиентов HP.
-
-
На панели управления должен отображаться индикатор состояния готовности. Если отображается сообщение об ошибке, для ее устранения следуйте инструкциям на панели управления.
-
Проверьте кабельные соединения.
-
Проверьте кабельное соединение между принтером и компьютером или сетевым портом. Проверьте надежность соединения.
-
Проверьте исправность кабеля, заменив его другим, если это возможно.
-
Проверьте сетевое соединение.
-
-
Проверьте, что указанные формат и тип бумаги соответствуют техническим характеристикам. Кроме того, откройте меню Лотки на панели управления принтера и убедитесь, что лоток настроен правильно для выбранного типа и формата бумаги.
-
Напечатайте страницу конфигурации, выполнив следующие действия.
Примечание.
Действия различаются в зависимости от панели управления.
FutureSmart 3
FutureSmart 4
FutureSmart 3
-
На главном экране панели управления принтера выполните прокрутку до кнопки Администрирование и нажмите ее.
-
Откройте следующие меню:
-
Отчеты
-
Страницы конфигурации/состояния
-
-
Нажмите на пункт Страница конфигурации, чтобы выбрать его.
-
Нажмите кнопку Печать, чтобы распечатать страницу конфигурации.
Примечание.
Если принтер подключен к сети, будет также распечатана страница HP Jetdirect.
FutureSmart 4
-
На главном экране панели управления принтера перейдите к пункту Отчеты и выберите его.
-
Выберите Страницы конфигурации/состояния.
-
Выберите Страница конфигурации.
-
Нажмите Печать, чтобы напечатать страницу конфигурации.
Примечание.
Если принтер подключен к сети, будет также распечатана страница HP Jetdirect.
Если страница не распечатается, проверьте, содержит ли хотя бы один лоток бумагу.
Если произошло замятие страницы, для его устранения следуйте инструкциям на экране панели управления.
Если страница напечатана неправильно, свяжитесь со службой поддержки HP.
Если страница напечатана правильно, проблема скорее всего связана с используемым компьютером, драйвером печати или программой.
-
-
Убедитесь, что для принтера установлен драйвер печати. Проверьте программу, чтобы убедиться, что используется драйвер печати для данного принтера. Драйвер печати находится на компакт-диске, поставляемом с принтером. Также драйвер печати можно загрузить с веб-сайта HP.
-
Распечатайте небольшой документ из другого приложения, из которого ранее печать выполнялась нормально. Если документ печатается нормально, значит, проблема заключается в программе. Если проблема не решена (документ не печатается), выполните следующие действия:
-
Попробуйте распечатать задание с другого компьютера, на котором установлено программное обеспечение принтера.
-
Если данный принтер подключен к сети, подсоедините его непосредственно к компьютеру с помощью USB-кабеля. Укажите нужный порт для принтера или переустановите программное обеспечение, выбрав используемый тип соединения.
Примечание.
Принтер поставляется с отключенным USB-портом. Чтобы включить USB-порт и использовать его для проверки возможности подключения принтера, убедитесь, что принтер находится в состоянии готовности.
-
-
Возможно, требуется обновление микропрограммы принтера. Инструкции по загрузке и установке обновлений для программного обеспечения и микропрограмм доступны на веб-сайте www.hp.com/support/ljMFPM725series. Нажмите кнопку Драйверы, ПО и микропрограммы, выберите операционную систему и затем выберите загрузку для принтера.
Спустя какое-то время любая оргтехника начинает сбоить во время работы. Это также касается лазерных принтеров и МФУ Hawlett-Packard (HP). К счастью, данные устройства оснащены средством самодиагностики, которое информирует потребителя о возникшей проблеме. Вывод информации может осуществляться различными способами: специфическим миганием светодиодных индикаторов, появлением специальных кодов на сегментном дисплее, отображением информационных сообщений с кодом и описанием ошибки, а также вывод кода ошибки на персональный компьютер. В этой статье мы представим самые популярные коды ошибок лазерных принтеров HP с их расшифровкой и рекомендациями по устранению.
Коды ошибок лазерных принтеров и МФУ HP
Первое, что нужно знать, так это то, что ошибки работы оргтехники делятся на несколько видов. Есть коды ошибок обычного информационного характера, которые просто показывают потребителю, что в данный момент делает печатающее устройство. Например, 00 READY ON LINE с кодом 10001 указывает лишь на то, что печатающее устройство готово к работе. В свою очередь, предупреждающие или сервисные коды ошибок HP, как правило, информируют о скором окончании онера, либо о том, что пора заменить какой-либо расходник. Страшнее всего, когда на дисплее принтера HP, появляется код критической ошибки. Возникновение подобного сообщения, обычно указывает на серьезную проблему с печатающим устройством (к примеру, поломка механизма протяжки бумаги, привода или блока лазера).
Быстрее всего узнать о возникшей проблеме можно по светодиодным индикаторам. В зависимости от их состояния можно приблизительно определить, что произошло с печатающим аппаратом. В частности, речь идет о следующем (пример взят из официального мануала HP LaserJet Pro M1132, M12a, M12w, P1102, P1102s, P1102w, P1106, P1108, P1109 и P1109w):
- Постоянно мигает индикатор Wi-Fi (беспроводной связи или локальной сети). Указывает на то, что принтер не может подключиться к сети. Нужно перенастроить параметры подключения, либо заменить модуль Wi-Fi.
- Постоянно мигает светодиод индикатора ошибки. Таким образом, устройство предупреждает о проблеме с тонер-картриджем. Также может указывать на то, что открыта верхняя крышка или на образования замятия бумаги/постороннего предмета.
- Постоянно горят два индикатора (обычно, это светодиод готовности и ошибки). Указывает на возникновение критической ошибки. Лучше всего не искать причину, а сразу обратиться в сервисный центр.
Кроме того, если после нажатия кнопки включения, ни один светодиод не загорается и принтер также не осуществляет пуск, то, скорее всего, возникли проблемы с блоком питания печатающего устройства. Далее представим таблицы с самыми популярными кодами ошибок принтеров HP.
Основные группы кодов ошибок лазерных принтеров HP
Код ошибки принтера HP |
Расшифровка |
Описание |
HP 10XXX |
Обычные сообщения информационного характера. |
Такие коды сообщают о готовности работы принтера, об отсутствии подключения (HP 10002) и т.д. |
HP 102XX |
Информационные сообщения о том, что устройство нуждается в обслуживании. |
Например, информирует об окончании тонера в картридже, а также о том, что пора заменить расходный материал. |
HP 11XXX |
Предупреждающие сообщения, касающиеся загрузки бумаги. |
Выводятся, когда в одном или нескольких лотках отсутствует бумажный носитель. Также может указывать на некорректность выставленного размера бумаги. |
HP 12XYY |
Серия кодов для лотков подачи бумаги. |
Указывают на наличие/отсутствие бумаги, а также на различные сбои в работе. |
HP 15XXY |
Серия кодов для лотков приема бумаги. |
Указывают на наличие/отсутствие бумаги, а также на различные сбои в работе. |
HP 20XXX |
Ошибки синтаксических команд. |
Появляются тогда, когда система обнаруживает нелогические команды, посылаемые печатающему устройству. |
HP 25XXX |
Ошибки, вызванные нарушением синтаксиса команд. |
Появляются тогда, когда система обнаруживает нелогические команды, посылаемые печатающему устройству. |
HP 27XXX |
Ошибки семантических команд. |
Появляются тогда, когда система обнаруживает нелогические команды, посылаемые печатающему устройству. |
HP 30XXX |
Ошибки, которые автоматически могут быть устранены. |
Тип информационных кодов, которые указывают на временные сбои в работе устройства, по типу, память принтера заполнена и т.д. |
HP 32XXX |
Ошибки файловой системы PJL. |
Появляются тогда, когда система обнаруживает сбои в работе системы. |
HP 35XXX |
Ошибки, которые можно сразу же решить выполнением определенных команд и продолжить работу. |
Такие коды приходят на дисплей принтера вместе с рекомендациями по их устранению. Например, когда нужно увеличить объем памяти. |
HP 40XXX |
Ошибки, которые можно решить выполнением определенных команд, но работа устройства прерывается. |
Такие коды приходят на дисплей принтера вместе с рекомендациями по их устранению. Например, когда необходимо перезагрузить печатающий аппарат, по той или иной причине. |
HP 41XYY |
Сервисные сообщения, касающиеся загрузки бумаги. |
Выводятся, когда во всех лотках отсутствует бумажный носитель. Указывает на некорректность выставленного размера бумаги, а также проблемы в работе данных частей принтера. |
HP 42XYY |
Сообщают о наличии замятия бумаги или постороннего предмета (актуально для HP LaserJet 5Si/ 5SiMx). |
В зависимости от кода можно максимально точно определить причину замятия бумаги. |
HP 43XYY |
Предупреждающие сообщения о проблемах с подключенными модулями. |
Многие офисные МФУ способны расширять свой функционал, за счет дополнительно подключенных моделей (лотков, податчиков, ADF и т.д.). Если в них обнаружатся сбои, то именно данные коды об этом проинформируют. |
HP 44XYY |
Сообщают о наличии замятия бумаги или постороннего предмета (актуально для HP LaserJet 4000/ 5000). |
В зависимости от кода можно максимально точно определить причину замятия бумаги. |
HP 50XXX |
Группа ошибок, указывающих на механические проблемы принтера. |
Если у принтера начал сбоить какой-то узел (печка, система охлаждения, блок лазера и т.д.), то принтер выдаст сообщение с кодом ошибки данной серии. |
HP 55XXX |
Ошибки, касающиеся персональных настроек печатающего устройства. |
Обычно можно исправить сбросом и перенастройкой принтера. |
На практике, вместо [X] и [Y] в коде будет указанно уникальное цифровое значение, соответствующее той или иной ошибке.
Коды ошибок принтеров и МФУ HP, выводимые на штатный дисплей устройства
Код ошибки принтера HP |
Содержание |
Расшифровка |
HP 10001 |
Принтер готов к работе (00). |
Принтер находится в режиме готовности, либо ему требуется незначительное сервисное обслуживание. Можно перезагрузить или очистить память принтера. Еще может помочь сброс настроек до заводских. |
Принтеру требуется сервисное обслуживание (68). |
||
Память принтера заполнена. Настройки не могут быть сохранены (68). |
||
HP 10002 |
Принтер не готов к работе (00). |
Принтер не готов к работе. Включить/разбудить/перезагрузить. |
Устройство нуждается в обслуживании (68). |
||
HP 10003 |
Осуществляется прогрев принтера (02). |
Печатающее устройство находится в режиме прогрева. Немного подождать, либо перезагрузить МФУ. |
HP 10004 |
Проводится самодиагностика печатающего устройства (05). |
Принтер создает тестовый отпечаток. Дождаться окончания процесса печати, либо перезагрузить устройство. |
Осуществляется печать страницы диагностики (05). |
||
HP 10005 |
Перезагрузка памяти (07). |
Параметры или память принтера были сброшены. Перенастроить печатающее устройство. |
Очистка памяти (07). |
||
HP 10006 |
Низкий уровень тонера в картридже (16). |
В тонер-картридже заканчивается красящее вещество. Заправить или купить новый картридж. |
HP 10007 |
Задание отменено. |
Очистите память принтера и очередь печати. Перезагрузите или перенастройте устройство. |
HP 10010 |
Буфер памяти принтера переполнен. |
Очистите память принтера и очередь печати. Перезагрузите или перенастройте устройство. |
HP 10011 |
Осуществляется подключение или отсутствует связь с дополнительными модулями принтера (18). |
Переподключить дополнительные лотки и прочие модули. Перезагрузить МФУ. |
HP 10013 |
Осуществляется печать тестовой страницы (04). |
Принтер создает тестовый отпечаток. Дождаться окончания процесса печати, либо перезагрузить устройство. |
HP 10014 |
Осуществляется печать тестовой страницы или листа конфигурации (06). |
Дождаться окончания процесса печати, либо перезагрузить устройство. |
HP 10015 |
Осуществляется печать шрифтов, поддерживаемых принтером (06). |
Дождаться окончания процесса печати, либо перезагрузить устройство. |
HP 10016 |
Осуществляется печать теста работы узлов печатающего устройства (15). |
Дождаться окончания процесса печати, либо перезагрузить устройство. |
HP 10017 |
Осуществляется демо-печать (06). |
Дождаться окончания процесса печати, либо перезагрузить устройство. |
HP 10018 |
Включение режима сброса настроек (09). |
Выйти из режима, перезагрузить принтер, либо выполнить сброс параметров (если устройство нуждается в этом). |
HP 10019 |
Включение режима сброса параметров активных портов (09). |
Выйти из режима, перезагрузить принтер, либо выполнить сброс параметров (если устройство нуждается в этом). |
HP 10020 |
Включение режима сброса параметров всех портов (09). |
Выйти из режима, перезагрузить принтер, либо выполнить сброс параметров (если устройство нуждается в этом). |
HP 10021 |
Осуществление сброса параметров принтера, в том числе очистка NVRAM (08). |
Дождаться окончания процесса, либо перезагрузить устройство. |
HP 10022 |
Осуществляется печать листа конфигурации (06). |
Дождаться окончания процесса печати, либо перезагрузить устройство. |
HP 10023 |
Осуществляется обработка задания. |
Дождаться окончания процесса, либо перезагрузить устройство. |
HP 10024 |
Осуществляется передача данных. |
Нужно принять/отменить задание, дождаться окончания процесса или перезагрузить принтер. |
HP 10025 |
Отказ в доступе к той или иной функции МФУ. |
Перезагрузить принтер, обратиться в СЦ за помощью. |
HP 10026 |
Невозможно отменить задание. |
Перезагрузить принтер, обратиться в СЦ за помощью. |
HP 10027 |
Забился тракт подачи бумаги. |
Следует очистить тракт от посторонних предметов, устранить замятие. |
HP 10028 |
Осуществляется печать журнала событий. |
Дождаться окончания процесса печати, либо перезагрузить устройство. |
HP 10029 |
Осуществляется подача бумаги. |
Дождаться окончания процесса, перезагрузить принтер, устранить проблему. |
HP 10030 |
Ошибки, связанные с системой команд PJL. |
Перезагрузить ноутбук, сбросить настройки принтера. |
HP 10031 |
Осуществляется самоочистка устройства. |
Дождаться окончания процесса, перезагрузить принтер, почистить устройство самостоятельно. |
HP 10032 |
Принтер не может распознать совместимый картридж. |
Установить оригинальный картридж, прошить принтер, заменить чип картриджа, сменить главную плату. |
HP 10033 |
Введен неверный PIN-код. |
Заново ввести код, сбросить настройки принтера. |
HP 10034 |
Прерывание задания. |
Очистить очередь печати, перезагрузить принтер, проверить подключение. Если все хорошо, продолжить работу. |
HP 10035 |
Можно продолжить выполнение прерванного задания. |
Подтвердить или отменить действие. |
HP 10036 |
Осуществление повторного прогрева печатающего устройства. |
Дождаться окончания процесса, перезагрузить принтер. |
HP 10200 |
Заканчивается черный тонер, но принтер еще может печатать. |
Временно продолжить работу. После придется перезаправить картридж или купить новый. |
HP 10201 |
Заканчивается голубой тонер, но принтер еще может печатать. |
Временно продолжить работу. После придется перезаправить картридж или купить новый. |
HP 10202 |
Заканчивается пурпурный тонер, но принтер еще может печатать. |
Временно продолжить работу. После придется перезаправить картридж или купить новый. |
HP 10203 |
Заканчивается желтый тонер, но принтер еще может печатать. |
Временно продолжить работу. После придется перезаправить картридж или купить новый. |
HP 10204 |
Требуется замена фотобарабана. |
Следует осуществить замену указанного расходника. |
HP 10205 |
Требуется замена черного фотобарабана. |
Следует осуществить замену указанного расходника. |
HP 10206 |
Требуется замена голубого фотобарабана. |
Следует осуществить замену указанного расходника. |
HP 10207 |
Требуется замена пурпурного фотобарабана. |
Следует осуществить замену указанного расходника. |
HP 10208 |
Требуется замена желтого фотобарабана. |
Следует осуществить замену указанного расходника. |
HP 10209 |
Требуется замена черного картриджа. |
Следует осуществить замену указанного расходника. |
HP 10210 |
Требуется замена голубого картриджа. |
Следует осуществить замену указанного расходника. |
HP 10211 |
Требуется замена пурпурного картриджа. |
Следует осуществить замену указанного расходника. |
HP 10212 |
Требуется замена желтого картриджа. |
Следует осуществить замену указанного расходника. |
HP 10213-10403 |
Различные коды сервисного обслуживания принтера, связанные с использованием расходных материалов. |
Заправить/заменить картридж, восстановить/заменить блок фотобарабана и т.д. Все зависит от информации, указанной в описании ошибки. |
Внимание: Не пытайтесь самостоятельно починить печатающий аппарат, если не имеете опыта сервисного обслуживания оргтехники. Лучше доверьте дело специалисту.
Коды ошибок E-серии для лазерных принтеров и МФУ HP
Код ошибки принтера HP |
Расшифровка |
Варианты решения |
HP E0 |
Указывает на замятие бумаги или наличие постороннего предмета. |
Извлечь замявшийся лист или иной предмет. Почистить или заменить ролик захвата бумаги. Проверить датчик и механизм протяжки бумаги. |
HP E1 |
Информирует об отсутствии бумаги в лотке подачи или установленный размер не соответствует. |
Загрузить или поправить бумагу. Проверить ролик захвата. Сменить задание на печать. |
HP E2 |
Предупреждает о том, что открыта дверца или датчик вышел из строя. |
Открыть/закрыть все крышки, проверить защелку и датчик. |
HP E3 |
Принтер не видит или не может распознать картридж. |
Поправить картридж, снять защитную чеку/пленку, прочистить чип картриджа и принтера и т.д. Подробнее, читайте в статье «Что делать, если принтер не распознает картридж». Почистить контакты и осуществить сервисное обслуживание принтера и картриджа. |
HP E4 |
Память печатающего устройства заполнена или ее не хватает. |
Очистить память принтера, сбросить настройки, прошить или сменить главную плату. |
HP E5 |
Проблема в работе механизма захвата или протяжки бумаги. |
Проверить наличие бумаги в лотке, поправить листы, пододвинуть флажок, почистить/заменить ролик захвата, проверить механизм протяжки, энкодер и датчик. Заменить или прошить главную плату. |
HP E6 |
Неизвестная ошибка работы принтера. |
Провести диагностику и сервисное обслуживание печатающего устройства. |
HP E7 |
Неизвестная аппаратная ошибка работы принтера. |
Провести диагностику и сервисное обслуживание печатающего устройства. |
HP E8 |
Критическая ошибка в работе сканера. |
Лучше всего отнести МФУ в сервисный центр. Однако можно разобрать и поправить линейку, либо осмотреть шестеренки привода (заменить, отремонтировать). |
HP E9 |
Неизвестная критическая ошибка работы принтера. |
Провести диагностику и сервисное обслуживание печатающего устройства. |
HP E10 |
Проблема в подключении дополнительных модулей. |
Перезапустить печатающий аппарат, выполнить переподключение проблемного модуля, проверить/заменить шлейф. |
HP E20 |
Не хватает памяти принтера для печати материала. |
Перезапустить устройство, очистить память и очередь печати, сменить задачу на печать. |
HP E21 |
Заполнена память печатающего устройства. |
Перезапустить устройство, очистить память и очередь печати, сменить задачу на печать, добавить оперативной памяти. |
HP E22 |
Сбой LPT-подключения или несоответствия драйвера принтера. |
Переподключить устройство к ПК, заменить кабель, переустановить драйвер. |
Также сюда стоит отнести ошибку HP 13.А, которая указывает на проблему с деталями механизма подачи бумаги (соленоидом, датчиком и т.д.).
Коды ошибок HP LaserJet, указывающие на проблемы аппаратной части устройства
Код ошибки принтера HP |
Расшифровка |
HP 50000 |
Данный код появляется в случае возникновения неизвестной ошибки, в работе аппаратной части печатающего устройства. |
HP 50001 |
Ошибка одного или нескольких модулей памяти, размещенных на плате форматера. |
HP 50002 |
Ошибка модуля оперативной памяти главной платы принтера. |
HP 50003 |
Код указывает на проблему двигателя печки лазерного принтера. |
HP 50004 |
Сработал датчик лазера, указывающий на проблему данной детали. |
HP 50005 |
Проблема с приводом сканера (скорее всего связанная с зеркалом). |
HP 50006 |
Проблема в приводе кулера. |
HP 50007 |
Потеря связи между контроллером и главной платой принтера. |
HP 50008 |
Код указывает на низкую температуру термоэлемента печки принтера. |
HP 50009 |
Код указывает на долгий период прогрева печки принтера до нужной температуры. |
HP 50010 |
Код указывает на высокую температуру прогрева печки принтера (перегрев). |
HP 50011 |
Неизвестная проблема, связанная с печкой лазерного МФУ. |
HP 50012 |
Проблема в работе датчика луча лазера. |
HP 50013 |
Проблема, связанная с блоком лазера принтера. |
HP 50014 |
Ошибка старта работы сканера. |
HP 50015 |
Ошибка движения линейки сканера. |
HP 50016-50019; HP 50030-50036 |
Проблема в слабом вращении или поломке одного из вентиляторов. |
HP 50020 |
Проблемы с механизмом подачи бумаги верхнего лотка. |
HP 50021 |
Проблемы с механизмом подачи бумаги нижнего лотка. |
HP 50022 |
Проблемы с механизмом подачи бумаги универсального лотка. |
HP 50023 |
Ошибка пуска основного электромотора принтера. |
HP 50024 |
Ошибка работы основного электромотора принтера. |
HP 50025 |
Ошибка подключения дополнительных модулей (актуально для больших офисных МФУ). |
HP 50026 |
Ошибка работы дополнительных модулей (актуально для больших офисных МФУ). |
HP 50027 |
Проблема в работе дуплекса принтера или МФУ (модуля двусторонней печати). |
HP 50028 |
Нарушение контакта между форматером и другими частями печатающего аппарата. |
HP 50029 |
Проблема в обработке или получении данных платой форматера. |
HP 50048-50063 |
Неизвестные ошибки принтера, связанные с распределением питания. |
HP 50064 |
Ошибка датчика совмещения желтого цвета. |
HP 50065 |
Ошибка датчика совмещения пурпурного цвета. |
HP 50066 |
Ошибка датчика совмещения голубого цвета. |
HP 50067 |
Ошибка датчика совмещения черного цвета. |
HP 50068 |
Несоответствие диапазона плотности желтого цвета. |
HP 50069 |
Несоответствие диапазона плотности пурпурного цвета. |
HP 50070 |
Несоответствие диапазона плотности голубого цвета. |
HP 50071 |
Несоответствие диапазона плотности черного цвета. |
HP 50072 |
Ошибка, возникающая из-за несоответствия данных датчика фазовой калибровки фотобарабана для желтого цвета. |
HP 50073 |
Ошибка, возникающая из-за несоответствия данных датчика фазовой калибровки фотобарабана для пурпурного цвета. |
HP 50074 |
Ошибка, возникающая из-за несоответствия данных датчика фазовой калибровки фотобарабана для голубого цвета. |
HP 50075 |
Ошибка, возникающая из-за несоответствия данных датчика фазовой калибровки фотобарабана для черного цвета. |
HP 505XX |
Сбой в работе прошивки лазерного принтера HP. |
HP 50599 |
Проблема с питанием платы форматера. |
Важно: В данном случае представлена только расшифровка кодов ошибок HP, так как в большинстве случаев устранить проблему очень сложно, даже для квалифицированного специалиста. Поэтому чаще всего приходится просто заменять испорченную деталь принтера.
Прочие коды ошибок лазерной оргтехники HP
Код ошибки принтера HP |
Расшифровка |
Варианты решения |
HP 10.XX.YY |
Проблема считывания данных с чипа картриджа (часто сопровождается сообщением «SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR»). |
Переустановить картридж, установить оригинальный картридж HP или сбросить ошибку (подробнее, читайте в статье «Как исправить ошибку памяти картриджа HP»). |
HP 10.32.XX |
Принтер определил, что установлен неоригинальный картридж. |
Проигнорировать и пользоваться принтером дальше (может перестать отображаться ресурс картриджа, а также будет часто выскакивать информационное окно о необходимости использования оригинальной продукции). Если нет такой возможности, проблему нужно решать уже исходя из особенностей оргтехники (замена чипа картриджа, прошивка принтера и т.д.). |
HP 11.01 и HP 11.02 |
Принтер постоянно запрашивает установку дату и времени, либо они отображаются некорректно. |
Необходимо заменить батарею или форматер принтера. |
HP 13.XX.YY (13.A, 13.02.00, 13.03.XX, 13.05.XX, 13.06.XX, 13.12.00, 13.20.00, 13.21.00) |
Произошло замятие бумаги. |
Извлеките замятую бумагу или посторонний предмет. Перезагрузите принтер, проверьте датчики бумаги, а также механизм протяжки бумаги. |
HP 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY |
Перегрузка оперативной памяти принтера. |
Нажмите продолжить печать, но при этом часть данных может быть утеряна. Лучше переделать файл и отправить его заново на печать. Также можно попробовать очистить память принтера или расширить, за счет установки дополнительного модуля. |
HP 21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX |
Принтер не может сжать изображение из-за его сложности. |
Нажмите продолжить печать, но при этом часть данных может быть утеряна. Упростите задание для печати. |
HP 22 EIO BUFFER OVERFLOW (EMBEDDED, PARALLEL, USB) |
Переполнен буфер памяти принтера или передаются по определенному каналу слишком объемный материал. |
Нажать продолжить, но данные будут утеряны. Проверить соединения, переключить порты или заменить кабели. |
HP 40 EMBEDDED I/O BAD TRANSMISSION |
Ошибка передачи данных. |
Нажать продолжить, на данные будут утеряны. Перезагрузить принтер и отправить повторное задание. Переустановить/заменить серверную карту или плату форматера. |
HP 41.3 UNEXPECTED PAPER SIZE IN TRAY X |
Формат бумаги не соответствует заданным параметрам. |
Установить бумагу соответствующего формата или сменить настройки печати. Сменить лоток (если их несколько). Проверить работу механизма протяжки и всех датчиков бумаги. Избавить МФУ от наличия посторонних предметов. |
HP 41.5 UNEXPECTED TYPE IN TRAY X |
Тип бумаги не соответствует заданным параметрам. |
Установить бумагу соответствующего типа или сменить настройки печати. Сменить лоток (если их несколько). Проверить работу механизма протяжки и всех датчиков бумаги. Избавить МФУ от наличия посторонних предметов. |
HP 41.X ERROR |
Неизвестная ошибка, связанная с протягиванием бумаги. |
Можно попробовать перезагрузить МФУ, почистить ролики захвата бумаги, либо разбирать и искать проблему по пути следования бумаги. |
HP 49.XXXXX ERROR |
Критическая ошибка, связанная с микропрограммой (прошивкой, firmware) принтера. |
Перезагрузите принтер, после чего отмените все задания печати, очистите очередь, проверьте обновления для принтера (обновите) и снова попытайтесь печатать при помощи фирменного ПО. Не помогло, пробуйте наоборот понизить версию прошивки, либо перепрошить принтер, установив на него дамп с нового устройства. Замените плату форматера. |
HP 50.X FUSER ERROR |
Проблема в работе печки лазерного принтера. |
Выключить принтер и дать ему отдохнуть около 30 минут. Проверить блок печки, почистить и заменить термоэлемент (если он в этом нуждается). Заменить весь блок, БП или плату микроконтроллера. |
HP 51.1X ERROR |
Проблема в работе датчика синхронизации луча лазера. |
Перезагрузить МФУ, проверить контакты, шлейфы и различные подключения. Заменить блок лазера или плату микроконтроллера. |
HP 52.XX.0 PRINTER ERROR |
Проблема в работе драйвера двигателя лазерного блока. |
Перезагрузить МФУ, проверить контакты, шлейфы и различные подключения. Заменить блок лазера или плату микроконтроллера. |
HP 53.10.01 PRINTER ERROR |
Принтер не поддерживает модуль памяти DIMM. |
Перезагрузить принтер. Переустановить или заменить модуль памяти. Заменить форматер. |
HP 55.XX.YY DC CONTROLLER ERROR |
Ошибка контроллера DC. |
Перезагрузить принтер. Проверить соединения на плате контроллера, либо заменить плату. |
HP 56.XX ERROR |
Неизвестная ошибка, возникшая во время печати. |
Перезапустить принтер. Проверить все контакты. Провести диагностику. |
HP 57.XX PRINTER ERROR |
Проблема в работе вентилятора лазерного принтера. |
Проверить кулер на работоспособность, почистить, смазать или заменить. |
HP 58.XX ERROR |
Неизвестная ошибка, связанная с работой процессора принтера. |
Проверить все контакты платы контроллера или заменить ее. |
HP 59.XX ERROR Main Motor |
Проблема в работе главного электромотора принтера. |
Выключить принтер и дать ему немного отдохнуть. Разобрать и проверить подключения и сам электромотор. Заменить в случае неисправности. |
HP 62 NO SYSTEM |
Принтер не может обнаружить систему управления. |
Перезапустить печатающее устройство, обновить прошивку, сменить главную плату. |
HP 64 ERROR |
Неизвестная ошибка, связанная с буфером хранения данных для лазера. |
Перезапустить печатающее устройство, обновить прошивку, сменить главную плату. |
HP 68.X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL |
Ошибка, связанная с переполнением памяти NVRAM. |
Продолжить печать, перезапустить принтер, очистить буфер памяти. |
HP 79.XXXX ERROR |
Критическая ошибка, связанная с аппаратной частью принтера или МФУ. |
Здесь может быть все что угодно. Нужно перезагружать принтер, разбирать и искать проблему. Чаще всего, дело заключается в неисправности материнской платы устройства. |
HP 8X. XXXX EIO ERROR |
Критическая ошибка подключения дополнительного модуля. |
Перезапустить принтер, переподключить модуль, обновить прошивку. Заменить плату форматера. |
Внимание: Не пытайтесь самостоятельно починить печатающий аппарат, если не имеете опыта сервисного обслуживания оргтехники. Лучше доверьте дело специалисту.